Fantabulosity logo

menu icon
subscribe
search icon
×

The Greatest Cowboy Burgers

The Greatest Cowboy Burgers

Cowboy Burgers: When you think cowboy food, you think bbq and bacon and hearty food, and these cowboy burgers are no exception! Juicy beef patties are topped with cheese, bbq sauce, bacon, and onions rings to create a burger fit for a cowboy.

Are cowboy burgers good you ask? Let me tell you, these are high on our list of favorite burgers! They’re right up there with our viral hamburgers in the oven recipe (and that’s saying something) and our blue cheese stuffed burger recipe.

A cowboy burger in the foreground with two cowboy burgers in the background.

❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

These are incredible burgers! Juicy burger patties are topped with barbecue sauce, cheddar cheese, crispy bacon, and crispy onion rings on top of that, and all sandwiched between soft hamburger buns. Pair them with these bbq baked beans with ground beef and talk about a hearty meal, that any cowboy would love!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🧾 Ingredients

The ingredients for this cowboy burger recipe are pretty simple, but they come together to create some of the best burgers you’ll ever make.

The ingredients for cowboy burgers laid out with labels on the image.
  • 1 ½ – 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 1 pound medium ground beef (or try ground venison for deer burgers!)
  • 1 teaspoon sea salt
  • 3 slices cheddar cheese 
  • 3 sesame buns
  • ½ cup barbecue sauce or more
  • 6 slices bacon, cooked and cut in half
  • 6 onion rings, cooked

See the printable recipe card farther down in this blog post for exact quantities and step-by-step instructions.

🤠 How to Make Cowboy Burgers

  1. Make 3 equal hamburger patties out of the ground beef and place back in the fridge to get cold (about 20 minutes).
Three beef burger patties on a plate.
  1. Take out and sprinkle burger patties with about 1 teaspoon salt. 
Three burger patties on a plate with salt sprinkled on them.
Step 3 of how to make cowboy burgers.
  1. Heat up a skillet or deep sided pan, on medium heat and cook hamburger patties 6 minutes per side or to your preferred doneness (ensure you are cooking up to at least 160F, adhering to health and safety guidelines), then top with cheese and allow it to slightly melt. 
Step 4 of building a cowboy burger with different toppings.
  1. Layer your burger:
    Bottom bun
    BBQ sauce
    Hamburger patty with cheese
    Bacon slices
    Onion rings
    Top bun (with more BBQ sauce if desired)
A hamburger bun with a burger patty and cheese on it, topped with bacon, two onion rings, and another burger bun.

📖 Substitutions & Variations

If you need to make some changes to this cowboy burger recipe, we’ve got you covered. Here are our suggestions…

  • Bun – use gluten free buns instead of sesame buns to make this gluten free (be sure to double check your bbq sauce too if you are making this gluten free – often sauces can contain gluten)
  • Vegetarian – the beef patty can be replaced with a plant-based patty and the bacon can be omitted or replaced with vegan bacon to make this vegetarian
  • Want to get creative? Try adding some of the burger toppings listed below!
Cowboy burger cut in half

🥬 What Toppings Do You Put on a Burger?

This cowboy burger is delicious with cheese, bacon, bbq sauce, and onion rings but you can definitely mix and match with your favorite burger toppings to create one that’s perfect for you.

A few toppings we like on our burgers include:

  • sliced tomatoes
  • caramelized onions
  • lettuce
  • fried egg (don’t knock it until you’ve tried it, it’s pretty great)
  • pickles
  • pineapple rings (like on our Aloha Burger!)
  • sauerkraut
  • mushrooms (cooked or raw, both are great)
Close up of cowboy burger

❄️ Storage

Once you put these bbq cowboy burgers all together, they wouldn’t store very well (the buns would become soggy from the bbq sauce). If you do need to make them ahead, store all of the ingredients separately and combine them when you are ready to eat them. They will stay good in the fridge for 2-3 days in airtight containers (although your onion rings will get a bit soggy if you store them).

You could make the burger patties ahead of time and freeze them. When cooking from frozen, make sure the internal temperature gets to at least 165° F.

💡 Expert Tips and FAQs

What is a cowboy burger made of?

A cowboy burger typically a beef patty topped with cheese, and then bbq sauce, bacon, and onion rings added on top.

Why is it called a hamburger if there’s no ham in it?

Whenever we make hamburgers, we think about this one (and it’s a good question, if you ask me). The reason we call them hamburgers is because they originated in Hamburg, Germany (just like frankfurters originated in Frankfurt, Germany)!

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

If you enjoyed this cowboy burger, you’re definitely going to want to try our cheeseburger sliders recipe, Juicy Lucy burgers, and our donut burgers! No boring burgers here – these are both super fun and delicious takes on the classic cheeseburger, just like the cowboy burger. Or, mix things up a bit and give these cheeseburger subs a try for a fun twist!

Recipe

cowboy burger on bun
Print Pin
5 from 4 votes

The Greatest Cowboy Burgers

Cowboy Burgers: When you think cowboy food, you think bbq and bacon and hearty food, and these cowboy burgers are no exception! Juicy beef patties are topped with cheese, bbq sauce, bacon, and onion rings to create a burger fit for a cowboy. 
Course Main Course
Cuisine American
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Total Time 32 minutes
Servings 3 servings
Calories 962kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 ½ – 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 1 pound medium ground beef
  • 1 teaspoon sea salt
  • 3 slices cheddar cheese
  • 3 sesame buns
  • ½ cup barbecue sauce or more
  • 6 slices bacon cooked and cut in half
  • 6 onion rings cooked

Instructions

  • Make 3 equal hamburger patties out of the ground beef and place back in the fridge to get cold (about 20 minutes).
  • Take out and sprinkle burger patties with about 1 teaspoon salt. 
  • Heat up a skillet or deep sided pan, on medium heat and cook hamburger patties 6 minutes per side or to your preferred doneness (ensure you are cooking up to at least 160F, adhering to health and safety guidelines), then top with cheese and allow it to slightly melt. 
  • Layer your burger:
    Bottom bun
    BBQ sauce
    Hamburger patty with cheese
    Bacon slices
    Onion rings
    Top bun (with more BBQ sauce if desired)

Notes

How to Store Leftover Burgers
Once you put these bbq cowboy burgers all together, they wouldn’t store very well (the buns would become soggy from the bbq sauce). If you do need to make them ahead, store all of the ingredients separately and combine them when you are ready to eat them. They will stay good in the fridge for 2-3 days in airtight containers (although your onion rings will get a bit soggy if you store them).
You could make the burger patties ahead of time and freeze them. When cooking from frozen, make sure the internal temperature gets to at least 165° F.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 962kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 41g | Fat: 69g | Saturated Fat: 29g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 26g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 189mg | Sodium: 1985mg | Potassium: 741mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 20g | Vitamin A: 941IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 248mg | Iron: 5mg

Red, White and Blue Dip

This Red, White, and Blue Dip is a delicious, patriotic, and oh-so-easy recipe that’ll have everyone raving for the 4th of July! I have a no-bake dessert for you that’s perfect for those upcoming summer holiday gatherings!

This festive dip is not only bursting with color but also packed with flavor and simple to make, especially for a patriotic holiday such as the Fourth of July. Trust me; you’ll want to whip this up in no time. 

Red white and blue dip in white bowl, with snack cakes on top.

Want to go further with your red, white, and blue theme for an Independence Day party, Memorial Day, or to celebrate other patriotic holidays? You could also make an American Flag Fruit Pizza that the kids will love. 4th of July Cupcakes are also simple and eye-catching, while you could also make some 4th of July Rice Krispie Treats as well.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It uses a few ingredients: There are just four main ingredients in this cake batter dip, along with some color-themed sprinkles to finish it.
  • Easy to make more: This delicious dessert dip serves about 16, but you can easily double it to make more for a larger gathering.
  • No bake dessert: Making this dip is done with no need to turn the oven on or use a pan, so it is quick and simple.

🧾 Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for red white and blue dip on white counter.
  • Cream cheese – A plain cream cheese is best for the dip, and let it come up to room temperature before making the recipe so it mixes easily.
  • Cream – Heavy cream is best. This adds richness to the dip that’s ideal.
  • Cake mixture – You’ll need 4 twin packages of red, white, and blue snack cakes to make the dip.

📖 Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Cream Cheese: You can swap cream cheese with Greek yogurt or dairy-free alternatives like cashew-based cream cheese, almond milk-based cream cheese, or even coconut cream (chilled and whipped) for a vegan-friendly option.
  • Heavy Cream: If you’re looking for a lighter alternative, try using half-and-half or whole milk. For a dairy-free version, opt for full-fat coconut milk, almond milk, or any other non-dairy milk of your choice.
  • Vanilla Extract: In case you run out of vanilla extract or want to try something different, you can use almond extract, maple syrup, or even honey to add a hint of sweetness and aroma to the dip.
  • Red, White, and Blue Snack Cakes: Feel free to get creative here! Replace the snack cakes with an assortment of fresh fruits like strawberries, raspberries, blueberries, and banana slices to amp up the nutrition. Or, try using red, white, and blue-colored cookies, pretzels, or rice cakes for a fun and crunchy twist.

📖 Variations

There’s always room for creativity when it comes to recipes. Here are some exciting variations you can try for the Red, White, and Blue Dip to keep things fresh and fun:

  • Fruity Twist: Add a burst of fruity flavor by mixing in your favorite fruit preserves or fruit curd (like raspberry, strawberry, or blueberry) into the dip. You can also fold in some finely chopped fresh fruits for added texture.
  • Chocolate Lovers’ Delight: Mix in some melted chocolate or cocoa powder for a rich, chocolaty version of the dip. You can even use white chocolate for a delicious contrast with the red and blue elements.
  • Tropical Paradise: Give your dip a tropical twist by adding crushed pineapple, shredded coconut, or a splash of coconut extract. Pair this variation with fresh tropical fruits for dipping.
  • Cheesecake Inspired: Transform your simple recipe into a no-bake cheesecake delight by adding a bit of lemon juice and zest for that tangy cheesecake flavor. You can serve it over a crushed graham cracker or cookie crust for an extra indulgent treat. Or make it into something like a cheesecake yogurt dip by adding some Greek yogurt along with the cake mix.
  • S’mores Fun: Fold in mini marshmallows and chocolate chips into the dip, and serve with graham crackers for a fun s’mores-inspired version everyone will adore.

Feel free to mix and match these ideas or create your own unique spin on the Red, White, and Blue Dip. The sky’s the limit when it comes to creating a memorable treat for your family and friends.

👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make Red, White and Blue Dip

This Red, White and blue dip is broken into 2 components:

  • Make the dip
  • Add the snack cakes and decorate

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

STEP 1: Combine the cream cheese and cream. Take a medium-sized mixing bowl and combine the package of cream cheese with heavy whipping cream. (Image 1).

STEP 2: Mix in vanilla extract. Combine with a hand mixer until smooth, then add a teaspoon of vanilla extract. (Image 2).

STEP 3: Add the cake bars. Lightly mix 4 packages of snack cakes into the cream cheese mixture by breaking them up. (Image 3).

Steps 1-3 of how to make red white and blue dip.

STEP 4: Decorate and serve. Transfer to a serving bowl and decorate with a snack cake, if preferred, and red and blue sprinkles.

Red, white and blue dip, in a small white bowl, with snack cakes on top.

You can enjoy this with graham crackers, cookies, pretzels, or vanilla wafers. You will also love serving this 4th of July Puppy Chow next to this fun, festive dip!

💭 Recipe Pro Tips

  • Chill the ingredients: Make sure your cream cheese or alternative base is chilled before mixing. This will help achieve a smooth and creamy texture without any lumps.
  • Room temperature ingredients: If using cream cheese, allow it to soften at room temperature for about 30 minutes before mixing. This will make it easier to blend with other ingredients for a smoother dip.
  • Gentle folding: When adding colorful elements (like fruit or food coloring), gently fold them into the dip to maintain their vibrant colors and avoid overmixing.

📋 Recipe FAQs

Can I make this dip ahead of time?

Absolutely! You can prepare the dip a day in advance and store it in the refrigerator, covered with plastic wrap. This will save you time and allow the flavors to meld together even more.

Can I make this recipe dairy-free?

Yes! You can substitute the cream cheese and heavy cream with dairy-free alternatives like cashew-based cream cheese, coconut cream, or almond milk. Just be sure to choose a thick and creamy non-dairy substitute to maintain the desired texture.

What fruits can I use for the red and blue colors?

If you want to use fruit instead of cake bars, there are plenty of options. For the red color, you can use fruits like cherries, pomegranate seeds, or red apple slices. For the blue color, blackberries or purple grapes are great alternatives. You can even get blue strawberries or use fresh blueberries.

Can I make this dip healthier?

Definitely! You can switch to a healthier base like Greek yogurt, use a natural sweetener like honey or maple syrup, and serve the dip with fresh fruits and whole-grain crackers for a nutritious twist.

Can I add nuts or seeds to the dip for added crunch?

Yes, feel free to fold in chopped nuts (such as almonds, pecans, or walnuts) or seeds (like chia seeds or flaxseeds) for added texture and a nutritional boost.

I hope these FAQs help you create the perfect Red, White, and Blue Dip for your family and friends. If you have any more questions, feel free to ask! Enjoy! 🎉🥣

🍽 What to Serve with Red, White and Blue Dip

There are plenty of delicious options to serve with the Red, White, and Blue Dip that cater to different tastes and preferences. Here are some ideas for dippers to accompany your festive dip:

  • Fresh fruits: Strawberries, raspberries, blueberries, apple slices, banana slices, pineapple chunks, or any other fruits you enjoy. The natural sweetness of fruits pairs well with the creamy dip.
  • Cookies: Graham crackers, vanilla wafers, shortbread cookies, or any other type of cookie that complements the flavors of the dip.
  • Pretzels: Regular or gluten-free pretzels add a salty crunch that contrasts nicely with the sweet and creamy dip.
  • Marshmallows: Regular or mini marshmallows offer a delightful, fluffy texture and a touch of extra sweetness.
  • Rice cakes: Plain or flavored rice cakes can provide a lighter, crunchy option for dipping.
  • Crackers: Whole-grain crackers, buttery crackers, or even flavored crackers (like cinnamon or chocolate) can be a tasty choice for scooping up the dip.
  • Crostini or baguette slices: Lightly toasted crostini or baguette slices give a more substantial dipping option with a delightful crunch.
  • Waffle or pancake pieces: For a fun breakfast or brunch twist, serve the dip with small pieces of waffles or pancakes.

❄️ Storage

To store leftover Red, White, and Blue Dip, simply follow these steps:

  1. Refrigerate: Place the dip in an airtight container or cover the bowl with plastic wrap to prevent it from drying out or absorbing any unwanted odors.
  2. Store: Keep the dip in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. The cool temperature will help maintain its freshness and flavor.

As for freezing the dip, it is possible but not highly recommended. The texture may change slightly upon thawing, which could affect the overall consistency and appearance of the dip. Cream cheese-based dips, in particular, can become a bit grainy or watery after freezing and thawing.

🥣 More Dip Recipes You’ll Love

Want to make more homemade dips for upcoming special occasions? You could try savory options like the Pretzel Cheese Dip to go alongside your dessert dips. Or something a little healthier with this Artichoke Jalapeno Dip recipe contrasts nicely with sweet dips. You can even go for a warm dip such as this Hot Taco Dip for cooler days.

🍰 More Dessert Recipes

Or, if you’re looking for more easy dessert recipes, you’ll love these top favorites:

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Red white and blue dip in small white bowl, with graham cracker dipped in.
Print Pin
5 from 1 vote

Red White and Blue Dip

Introducing the Red, White, and Blue Dip – a delicious, patriotic, and oh-so-easy recipe that'll have everyone raving!
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 16 servings
Calories 61kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 8 ounces cream cheese (1 packet) softened
  • 2 Tablespoons heavy whipping cream can use milk or half and half if needed
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 4 twin packages red, white and blue snack cakes or similar, white cakes
  • red and blue sprinkles optional

Instructions

  • In a medium sized mixing bowl, add a package of cream cheese and heavy whipping cream.
  • Add in a teaspoon of vanilla extract and combine with a hand mixer until smooth.
  • Break up 4 packages of snack cakes and lightly mix them into the cream cheese mixture.
  • Pour into a serving bowl and garnish with one snack cake, if desired, and red and blue sprinkles.
  • Serve with graham crackers, cookies, pretzels, or vanilla wafers.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 61kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 48mg | Potassium: 21mg | Fiber: 0.003g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 219IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 0.03mg

Strawberry Chocolate Muffins

These strawberry chocolate muffins are an easy muffin recipe that gives you that bakery-style flavor you love!

Homemade muffins hit the spot especially when they’re made with fresh strawberries! These make such a great quick and easy snack, breakfast, dessert, or whip up a batch for the farmers market!

Strawberry chocolate muffins on cooling rack, with one in the middle, split in half.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

❤️ Why You’ll Love These Strawberry Chocolate Muffins

  • It’s simple. This recipe will produce a fluffy muffin with just basic ingredients! There’s no sour cream, greek yogurt, or special ingredients in this recipe. Just kitchen staples… making this one of my favorite muffin recipes!
  • It’s quick! In under 30 minutes, you can make a batch of these fluffy strawberry muffins. Since you can quickly make this recipe, it makes it the perfect last-minute dessert to have with a cup of iced coffee.
  • It uses fresh fruit. Is there anything better than freshly chopped juicy strawberries in baked goods?? Especially when they’re paired with mini chocolate chips!? There’s no better combo in my opinion and they remind me so much of bakery muffins!
  • Chocolate fan. If you’re a chocolate chip fan, and love a good chocolate chip cookie recipe, then why wouldn’t you love these muffins too!?

? What Makes Muffins Light and Fluffy?

There are a few key things you can do to achieve light and fluffy muffins. The first is make sure your eggs and oil are at room temperature before combining with the other ingredients. When at room temperature, it allows the batter to trap air and expand while baking.

In addition to that, baking powder allows baked goods rise in the oven. When your muffins expand and rise in the oven, they come out light and fluffy!

🧾 Ingredients Needed:

Labeled ingredients on white countertop for strawberry chocolate chip muffins.
  • 1 ½ Cups All-Purpose Flour
  • ½ Cup Granulated Sugar
  • ¼ Cup Brown Sugar
  • 2 Teaspoons Baking Powder
  • ½ Teaspoon Ground Cinnamon
  • 2 Large Eggs
  • ½ Cup Vegetable Oil
  • 1 teaspoon Vanilla Extract
  • 1 Cup Chopped Strawberries
  • ½ Cup Mini Chocolate Chips

👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make Strawberry Chocolate Muffins

Steps 1-4 for making strawberry chocolate chip muffins.
  1. Preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit and prepare a muffin tin with cooking spray. 
  2. In a large mixing bowl, mix flour, sugar, baking powder, and cinnamon.
  3. In a separate bowl whisk eggs, vegetable oil, and vanilla extract. 
  4. Combine wet ingredients with dry ingredients and mix well and fold in diced strawberries and chocolate chips.
Steps 5-6 for making strawberry chocolate chip muffins.
  1. Divide batter evenly in a muffin tin (or muffin cups) to make 12 muffins.
  2. Bake for 15-20 minutes or until a toothpick inserted into the middle comes out clean.
  3. Allow cooling slightly before removing from muffin tin and if desired, place on a wire rack to cool. Enjoy!

💡 Expert Tips and FAQs

How do I store leftover strawberry chocolate chip muffins?

You can store leftover muffins in an airtight container, or a container tightly covered with plastic wrap, at room temperature for up to 4 days. I find they stay best if you line the bottom of your airtight container with paper towels and then place the muffins on top. 

What is the secret to making moist muffins?

There are a couple of secrets to making extra moist muffins. Adding oil into the batter is guaranteed to make moist muffins but you also want to make sure you are not over-mixing your muffin batter or over-baking your muffins.

Can I use dark chocolate chips?

Yes! You can substitute milk chocolate chips for dark chocolate chips. Dark chocolate chips are not as sweet so it will tweak the flavor a bit but it’s all about preference.

Strawberry chocolate muffin on cooling rack.

🍓 More Fresh Fruit Ideas

If you want to add more than just fresh strawberries, you can add cherries, blueberries, and/or raspberries to this recipe. If you do choose to add extra fruit, make sure it’s chopped and then fold it in with the chocolate chips. This is a great way to use up any fruit that may be aging quickly!

🥛 What to Serve With These Muffins

A sweet treat pairs so well with a crispy piece of bacon in the mornings! I love making bacon in the air fryer because it’s quick and the clean-up is easy! If bacon isn’t your thing, you can pair the fluffy muffins with a sausage breakfast casserole!

Strawberry chocolate chip muffins on white plate, surrounded by strawberries.

If you’re a strawberry lover you have to check out these strawberry cheesecake cookies! They are to-die-for and a crowd favorite at parties. As I said before, nothing beats a sweet treat for breakfast! My boys love my easy peach turnovers and my easy blueberry turnovers in the morning! Or, check out these other favorite bakery and bread recipes:

Recipe

Strawberry chocolate muffins on cooling rack.
Print Pin
5 from 9 votes

Strawberry Chocolate Muffins

These strawberry chocolate chip muffins are a great way to start your day! There's nothing better than a light and fluffy baked treat in the morning.
Course Breakfast, Dessert, Snack
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 12 muffins
Calories 239kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour
  • ½ cup granulated sugar
  • ¼ cup brown sugar
  • 2 teaspoon baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 2 large eggs
  • ½ cup vegetable oil
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 cup diced strawberries
  • ½ cup mini chocolate chips

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit and prepare a muffin tin with cooking spray. 
  • In a large bowl, mix flour, sugar, baking powder, and cinnamon.
  • In a small bowl whisk eggs, vegetable oil, and vanilla extract. 
  • Combine wet ingredients with dry ingredients and mix well. 
  • Fold in diced strawberries and chocolate chips.
  • Divide batter evenly in a muffin tin to make 12 muffins. 
  • Bake for 15-20 minutes or until a toothpick inserted into the middle comes out clean. 
  • Allow cooling slightly before removing from muffin tin. Enjoy!

Notes

What’s the secret to making muffins moist?
There are a couple of secrets to making extra moist muffins. Adding oil into the batter is guaranteed to make moist muffins but you also want to make sure you are not over-mixing your muffin batter or over-baking your muffins.

Nutrition

Calories: 239kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 28mg | Sodium: 18mg | Potassium: 120mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 58IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 51mg | Iron: 1mg

4th of July Puppy Chow

This 4th of July Puppy Chow is not only easy to make but is so fun to celebrate the Fourth of July with, as a quick no-bake dessert idea or even as a snack recipe to munch on during the day and evening, while waiting for fireworks!

Fourth of July Muddy Buddies in white bowl, next to small American flag.

With the Fourth of July being right in the middle of summer, keeping things easy and cool, is key! This no-bake recipe only takes about 30 minutes (20 minutes of it being inactive time) to make and it can sit out all day too! So no need to worry about refrigerating this, although you will want to keep it out of super hot spaces, as the chocolate could melt.

This recipe is definitely a beginner skill level and easier to make than say, our 4th of July cupcakes or Red, White, and Blue Star Rice Krispy Treats but they’re so cute!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • 5 simple ingredients: With only 5 ingredients, this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand, or can easily grab at almost any grocery store. Since it’s so easy, you may want to go ahead and make this Fourth of July Dip too!
  • Make-ahead recipe: Did you know that you can make this recipe in advance if you want to? It’s true. Simply make it, allow it to cool and rest, and then store until ready to enjoy.
  • Ready in only 30 minutes: Talk about a quick and easy recipe! This recipe, from start to finish, only takes half an hour!

🧾 Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes in case you find them helpful.

Labeled ingredients for red white and blue puppy chow, on white counter.
  • Cereal – We use the Rice Chex but you can also use Corn Chex (or a generic version).
  • Chocolate Chips – Using white chocolate, helps keep the puppy chow, a brighter white color.
  • Powdered Sugar – This recipe calls for 2 cups but you can always use more if you want to sprinkle the top of the puppy chow while drying, so it really gets that “white” color, so it doesn’t melt in.

📖 Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Chocolate Chips – even though we used white chocolate chips, you can use milk chocolate or even semi-sweet.
  • Peanut Butter – creamy peanut butter is preferred for this recipe but if you love that crunch, you can also use crunchy peanut butter.

👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make 4th of July Puppy Chow

Begin by grabbing a large cookie sheet, and then cover it with parchment paper, and set it aside, so it’s ready whenever you need to pour your melted chocolate puppy chow on top of it.

This is also a great time to separate the blue and red M&M’s from the other colors if you haven’t done so already. This is a job that my kids love doing, so it’s a great activity to keep the kids busy for a bit.

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-4 of how to make white chocolate muddy buddies.

STEP 1. Chocolate and Peanut Butter. In a microwave safe bowl, one that’s large enough to fit 6 cups of cereal in a later step, pour in the 1 cup of chocolate chips and the 1 cup of peanut butter (Image 1).

STEP 2. Melt. Place bowl in microwave, and cook for 30 seconds, and stir. Cook for another 30 seconds, and stir. If the chocolate has not melted yet, keep cooking in 30-second intervals, stirring after each time, until melted. Do NOT overcook or chocolate will burn and not melt well (Image 2).

STEP 3. Add cereal. Next, pour in the 6 cups of cereal in to the melted chocolate mixture and stir gently, without breaking the cereal, to fully coat the cereal (Image 3).

STEP 4. Add powdered sugar. Next, pour 2 cups of powdered sugar over the cereal mixture and gently stir again, making sure not to break the small pieces of cereal (Image 4).

Tip: Instead of stirring the cereal mixture, you can also place it in a large paper bag, and shake the chocolate cereal mixture with powdered sugar.

Steps 5-6 4th of July puppy chow.

STEP 5. Spread on the sheet. Pour the cereal mixture on top of the parchment paper-covered baking sheet, and gently spread it out to allow it to cool and dry completely (Image 5). You may also want to sprinkle extra powdered sugar on top at this step, but it’s not required.

STEP 6. Add candies. When the cereal mixture has cooled and dried, this is a great time to add the 1 cup of red and blue M&M’s. Stir and serve or store for later (Image 6).

4th of July Puppy Chow in white bowl, next to American Flag.

💭 Recipe Pro Tips

  • Change for the seasons. You can make this without the candies, any time of year, or add seasonal candies or sprinkles to fit the holiday that you’re celebrating.
  • Allow to cool. Make sure you allow the puppy chow to cool before storing or the condensation could make the puppy chow soggy.

📋 Recipe FAQs

Can I make 4th of July recipes for Memorial Day too?

Absolutely. The red, white, and blue colors like in this puppy chow recipe is not only great for the 4th of July but it’s great for Memorial Day too!

How do you store puppy chow?

With this being chocolate-based, and with the chocolate candies, it’s best that this doesn’t sit in a hot, sunny location or it could all melt. However, it doesn’t have to be refrigerated and can sit out on the counter if stored in an airtight container for 4-5 days.

Where do you find red and blue M&Ms?

We just picked out the red and blue candies, out of the regular package, and saved the rest for later.

⭐️ More Puppy Chow Recipes You’ll Love

Love puppy chow? We do too. Here you’ll find a few other puppy chow favorites and snacks here on the blog:

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

4th of July Puppy Chow in white bowl, next to American Flag.
Print Pin
5 from 1 vote

4th of July Puppy Chow

This red, white and blue puppy chow is the perfect no-bake 4th of July dessert. It uses simple ingredients, and it's ready in about 30 minutes.
Course Dessert, Snack
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Drying Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 15 servings
Calories 270kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 6 cups square rice cereal
  • 1 cup white chocolate chips
  • 1 cup creamy peanut butter
  • 2 cups powdered sugar
  • 1 cup red and white chocolate candies We picked out the red and blue m&ms.

Instructions

  • Chocolate and Peanut Butter. In a microwave safe bowl, one that's large enough to fit 6 cups of cereal in a later step, pour in the 1 cup of chocolate chips and the 1 cup of peanut butter.
  • Melt. Place bowl in microwave, and cook for 30 seconds, and stir. Cook for another 30 seconds, and stir. If the chocolate has not melted yet, keep cooking in 30-second intervals, stirring after each time, until melted. Do NOT overcook or chocolate will burn and not melt well.
  • Add cereal. Next, pour in the 6 cups of cereal in to the melted chocolate mixture and stir gently, without breaking the cereal, to fully coat the cereal.
  • Add powdered sugar. Next, pour 2 cups of powdered sugar over the cereal mixture and gently stir again, making sure not to break the small pieces of cereal.
  • Spread on the sheet. Pour the cereal mixture on top of the parchment paper-covered baking sheet, and gently spread it out to allow it to cool and dry completely. (You may also want to sprinkle extra powdered sugar on top at this step, but it's not required.)
  • Add candies. When the cereal mixture has cooled and dried, this is a great time to add the 1 cup of red and blue M&M's. Stir and serve or store for later.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 270kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 172mg | Potassium: 152mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 25g | Vitamin A: 204IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 72mg | Iron: 4mg

Bronuts

These Bronuts are made from brownie batter from scratch and turned in to donuts. They’re the ultimate chocolatey, thick, fudgy stick-to-the-roof-of-your-mouth kind of sweet treat. Brownie recipes have just gotten an upgrade.

Bronuts with sprinkles dropping down on top.

Brownie donuts are all the rage. They aren’t just “chocolate donuts,” no way! Think of the richest brownies you’ve had (like these brownies with cream cheese frosting) that aren’t at all cake-like. That’s these times three. Deep, dark brownie doughnuts filled with chocolate chips and topped with chocolate glaze – yum!

Speaking of brownies, you don’t have to worry about messing with a mold if you don’t want to – just grab a Cast Iron Skillet and pour that batter in.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Best for chocaholics: Grab your favorite bittersweet bar and creamy milk chocolate chips for the best contrast.
  • Make-ahead recipe: Did you know these brownie donuts taste even better the next day? So they’re a breakfast recipe that you can make the night before and then simply wake up and enjoy.
  • Fun party options: Select sprinkles that fit your holiday to create a beautiful dessert spread, and they’re perfect for all of your parties.

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for bronuts.
  • Butter – We use unsalted for this recipe but you can use salted if you prefer. Just remember that you may want to reduce the amount of salt the recipe calls for if using salted butter.
  • Bittersweet Chocolate – Select your favorite high-quality brand of bittersweet chocolate as the perfect base for these brownie donuts.
  • Chocolate Chips – I love to use milk or semisweet as a contrast to the deep, dark batter.
  • Eggs – You might be shocked to see we need four eggs. But that’s the secret to fudgy brownies: a high ratio of eggs to flour and cocoa.
  • Sugar – Combining both brown and white sugars is what gives a really deep flavor experience.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Chocolate chips – got a favorite milk chocolate bar? Go ahead and chop it up instead of already-formed chips
  • Butter – salted or unsalted are both fine. I know some bakers swear by only using unsalted, but if your store only had salted on sale, it’s totally fine.

Variations

OK, I know not everyone loves chocolate as much as I do. You can absolutely cut back on the chocolate!

  • Frosting – skip the cocoa powder in the frosting ingredients and use only powdered sugar to make a sweet vanilla frosting.
  • Sprinkles – use mini chocolate chips in place of sprinkles, pick different colored jimmies, or even leave them off completely.
  • Chocolate Chips – try white chocolate for a fun contrast when the doughnuts are bit into.

Equipment

A donut pan is something not everyone has – but it sure does make it easy! This is a two-pack and the recipe does make at least 12 donuts, but you definitely don’t need to buy two. If you have just one pan that makes 6 donuts, the batter is fine resting while the first pan cooks and cools.

How to Make Bronuts

These Brownie Donuts are made in 2 quick parts:

  • mix batter and bake
  • ice and sprinkle

I recommend baking all the donuts first, whether that’s in one or two rounds in the oven, then let them all cool completely before icing. Much like baking a cake, the donuts need to be cool so the icing doesn’t melt right off.

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Preheat the oven and get out a saucepan.

Steps 1-4 on how to make bronuts.

STEP 1. Melt the butter. Add bittersweet chocolate and butter to the saucepan and get things going! (Images 1 and 2).

STEP 2. Beat the eggs. Whisk the eggs and sugars together in a bowl (Image 3). It should froth and increase in volume (Image 4).

Steps 5-8 on how to make brownie donuts.

STEP 3. Add the melted butter and chocolate to the egg mixture and fold together (Image 5) then stir in the vanilla and oil (Image 6).

Tip: Do NOT overmix! Stirring too much will activate the gluten in the flour and make your brownie donuts more cake-like. Fold in the flour until you no longer see any streaks of flour. Likewise, only just fold the chocolate chips to incorporate.

STEP 4. Add flour, cocoa, and salt (Image 7). Stir just until all streaks of white are gone (Image 8).

Steps 9-11 on how to make bronuts.

STEP 5. Gently mix in chocolate chips (Image 9).

STEP 6. Spray the mold with cooking spray and use a piping bag to fill the molds (Images 10 and 11). Bake until a toothpick tester is still slightly wet.

Tip: Don’t overbake – just like a pan of brownies, these will likely still seem underbaked when you remove them from the oven. That is key to keep the fudgy interior. Your cake tester will still have some wet batter on it and that’s ok!

Steps 12-15 on how to make bronuts.

STEP 7. Once the donuts are cool, add icing ingredients to a bowl (Image 12) then whisk until smooth (Image 13).

STEP 8. Have cooled donuts ready on a cooling rack (Image 14), and carefully dip the top of each donut into the bowl of icing (Image 15).

Hand holding brownie donut, with chocolate glaze on top.

Tip: If adding sprinkles, be sure and do that before the icing has fully set so they are glued on.

Bronuts on cooling rack with sprinkles on top.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • High quality ingredients. Since these are so chocolatey, you definitely want to start with the best chocolate you can. Pick something you’d enjoy eating on its own.
  • Correct technique. Don’t be tempted to overmix the brownie batter, we want these brownies to taste thick and fudgy but not cakey.
Chocolate bronuts on white counter.

Recipe FAQs

What is a bronut?

This may be a new word to you, but a bronut is a combination of a brownie and a donut. The best, super fudgy brownie batter baked into the shape of a donut! This is a similar concept to cronuts – croissant donuts!

How do I make a donut mold?

Not sure you want to invest in a donut pan? You can make your own donut mold but it can be a bit finicky. Start with a square of foil and gather the center up to make a “point” for the hole in a donut and then gather up the edges to make walls. You can either shape it by hand or wrap it around a biscuit cutter to get the right shape (but don’t bake your cutter!).

Is it better to bake or fry doughnuts?

Cake donuts are usually baked, just like cake. The raising agents (egg here, or baking powder/soda in other baked goods) have a chemical reaction in the oven to gain the right texture. On the other hand, yeast donuts will be fried to get the quick raising action of super fluffy bread dough!

How should I store bronuts?

Bronuts should be stored in an airtight container at room temperature where they will keep for at least 4 days. The flavor is even better the next day!

What to Serve with Bronuts

This bronut recipe goes well with fruit if you want to feel virtuous and sneak them for breakfast. As a dessert recipe, they obviously stand alone but you could go all out and whip up some Cookies and Cream Milkshakes to make it a real party!

Stack of bronuts with bite taken out of top one.

More Donut Recipes You’ll Love

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Bronuts, stacked on top of one another with sprinkles on top.
Print Pin
5 from 4 votes

Bronuts

Bronuts are triple chocolate donuts made from brownie batter and are the ultimate chocolatey, thick, fudgy stick-to-the-roof-of-your-mouth sweet treat. They're so delicious and they are easy to make too!
Course Breakfast, Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 12 bronuts
Calories 456kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Equipment

  • Piping Bags
  • donut pans
  • Cooking Spray

Ingredients

  • 8 ounces bittersweet chocolate, finely chopped or 1 cup bittersweet chocolate chips
  • ¾ cup unsalted butter cut into small pieces
  • 4 eggs
  • ¾ cup light brown soft sugar
  • ½ cup granulated white sugar
  • 1 teaspoon vegetable oil
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • ¾ cup all purpose flour
  • ½ cup cocoa powder
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ½ cup semi sweet or milk chocolate chips

For topping

  • 1 cup powdered sugar
  • 6 tablespoons cocoa powder
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla
  • 6 tablespoons whole milk
  • 2 tablespoons sprinkles

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 °F.
  • Put the chopped chocolate and butter into a saucepan set over a low heat. Heat until fully melted then set aside.
  • In a large mixing bowl, add the eggs brown sugar and white sugar. Beat for a couple of minutes until the mixture looks thick and frothy and has increased in volume by about half.
  • Pour the melted chocolate mixture into the beaten egg mixture. Use a spatula or wooden spoon to fold the ingredients together until it’s a uniform color.
  • Add the vegetable oil and vanilla extract and briefly mix until combined.
  • Tip in the flour, cocoa powder and salt.
  • Fold the ingredients very gently. Stop mixing when you can no longer see white streaks of flour.
  • Tip in the chocolate chips and mix gently to combine.
  • Put the donut moulds onto a baking sheet and spray them with cake release.
  • Transfer the brownie batter to a piping bag. Snip the end off with a pair of scissors then pipe the brownie batter into the molds until they are almost full. You might have some brownie batter left over (see notes).
  • Put the baking sheet into the oven and bake for 15 minutes.
  • Remove from the oven and leave the moulds to cool to room temperature on a cooling rack.
  • Once cool, pop the Brownie Donuts out of the molds.
  • To make the glaze, put the powdered sugar and cocoa powder into a mixing bowl and use a handheld whisk to combine.
  • Add the vanilla extract and 6 tablespoons of milk and mix thoroughly.
  • Check the consistency – you may need to add additional milk by the tablespoon to thin it out.
  • It should look the consistency of thick melted chocolate.
  • Dip the donuts into the glaze giving them a little shake as you pull them out of the bowl. If desired, add sprinkles right away before the glaze sets.

Notes

  • As this recipe is completely chocolate centric we recommend only using the highest quality chocolate you can afford. It will make the world of difference to the overall brownie flavor. Use high quality bittersweet baking chips OR 2 4 ounce bars of bittersweet chocolate – the good stuff!
  • Don’t be tempted to overmix the brownie batter, we want these brownies to taste thick and fudgy but not cakey.
  • If you have any batter left over after filling the molds just leave it in the piping bag and wait until the other brownie donuts are done cooking and the moulds have cooled. It will be fine in the bag while you wait.
  • Likewise, don’t over bake them. The brownies will bake up quicker in the donut molds than if you used a pan. 15 minutes should be plenty. You can check for doneness with a toothpick which should come out with some wet crumbs stuck to it.
  • As the Brownie Donuts cool they will continue to set and will become more fudgy with time.

Nutrition

Serving: 1bronut | Calories: 456kcal | Carbohydrates: 60g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 86mg | Sodium: 148mg | Potassium: 303mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 46g | Vitamin A: 448IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 106mg | Iron: 2mg

Crab Cake Sandwich

This crab cake sandwich recipe combines the irresistible flavors of tender, flaky crab meat with a crispy golden crust, all nestled between two soft buns. Sandwich recipes are an easy dinner idea or even lunch recipe and this crab cake sandwich makes any meal, less boring!

Crab cake sandwich on white plate.

Whether you’re a seasoned home cook or just starting out in the kitchen, this Crab Cake Sandwich is sure to impress your taste buds and leave you craving more. So, let’s dive into the fantastic world of this incredible dish that’s bound to become a new favorite in your house! This is also a fancier, warm version of a crab sandwich but if you’re looking for a cold, lunch-style sandwich, this crab salad sandwich is perfect!

Still have some crab left after the recipe, or do you just want to try more dishes with crab (even imitation crab)? You could make a delicious Crab Pasta Bake for the family or try a Crab Salad. Or share your new favorite ingredient and make an Easy Crab Bisque instead.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It is easy to personalize: You can change the seasoning and vegetables added to the crab cakes to make it just how you like it
  • Easy to increase the portions: Need more than 4-6 servings? Then you can easily create more crab cakes to feed a bigger group.
  • Ready in only 50 minutes: There’s only a short prep period and a little cooking time, with most of the recipe time for chilling, so you can do something else in the middle!

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Ingredients for crab cake sandwiches.
  • Crab meat – You’ll need about a pound of crab meat for this recipe. If you use canned Lump Crab meat, make sure to drain it well, as too much liquid makes the crab cakes fall apart.
  • Crackers – Saltine crackers are perfect to add extra crunch to this recipe, finely crush them before adding them to the mix.
  • Seasonings – We used my favorite Tony’s Chacheries for the Cajun seasoning, along with ground mustard and some dried basil.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Saltine crackers: You can replace saltine crackers with other types of crackers like Ritz or whole wheat crackers. Alternatively, you can use breadcrumbs (either plain or seasoned) or panko crumbs for a similar texture.
  • Cajun seasoning: You can create your own blend by combining common spices like paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, cayenne pepper, black pepper, dried thyme, and dried oregano. Adjust the ratios according to your taste preferences. If you prefer a milder flavor, you can use Old Bay seasoning or Creole seasoning instead.
  • Ground mustard: Dijon mustard or yellow mustard can be used as a substitute for ground mustard. You can also use dry mustard powder or a pinch of turmeric for color and a slight mustard flavor.
  • Green onions: Chopped chives, shallots, or red onions can be used as a substitute for green onions. They will provide a slightly different flavor but still add a nice touch to your crab cakes.
  • Pimento peppers: You can replace pimento peppers with diced red bell peppers or roasted red peppers for a similar taste and texture. If you’d like a spicier kick, try using diced jalapeño peppers or banana peppers.

Feel free to mix and match these substitutions to suit your taste buds and make the perfect crab cakes for you and your loved ones!

Variations

Crab cake sandwiches are versatile and can be customized to suit different taste preferences. Here are some delicious variations you can try:

  • Sauces: Swap out the remoulade sauce for other sauces like homemade tartar sauce, garlic aioli sauce, chipotle mayo, sriracha mayo, or hot sauce for a spicy kick.
  • Bread: Experiment with different types of bread, such as ciabatta, sourdough, or even a pretzel bun, to change up the texture and flavor of your sandwich.
  • Cheese: Add a slice of your favorite cheese, such as cheddar, Swiss, pepper jack, or provolone, for a gooey, melty twist.
  • Toppings: Enhance your crab cake sandwich with additional toppings like lettuce, tomato, avocado, this KFC coleslaw recipe, pickles, caramelized onions, or bacon for extra flavor and texture.
  • Seasoning: Incorporate unique seasonings into your crab cake mixture, such as curry powder, za’atar, or Italian seasoning, to create a different flavor profile.
  • Seafood mix: Combine crab meat with other seafood, like shrimp or scallops, for a more complex and luxurious taste.
  • Gluten-free: Make your crab cakes gluten-free by using gluten-free breadcrumbs with the traditional recipe or add some crushed gluten-free crackers instead of regular saltine crackers.
  • Vegetarian option: Replace crab meat with a mixture of mashed chickpeas or hearts of palm and add extra seasonings to mimic the taste and texture of crab cakes.

With these variations, you can create a crab cake sandwich that caters to your taste buds and dietary preferences while still enjoying the essence of this delicious dish.

How to Make Crab Cake Sandwiches

This Crab Cake Sandwich recipe is broken into 2 components:

  • Mix the ingredients
  • Cook the crab cakes and serve

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-4 of crab cake sandwiches.

STEP 1:  Mix the crab cake ingredients. Set aside the crab, crushed crackers, Cajun seasoning, basil, and mustard powder in a medium-sized mixing bowl and gently stir them together. (Image 1).

STEP 2: Mix the wet ingredients. Beat the egg in a small bowl and then mix in green onion, pimentos, lemon juice, and lemon zest. (Image 2).

STEP 3:  Make the crab cakes. Carefully mix the egg mixture with the crab mixture and shape it into burgers, approximately 4 ounces each if making 4. Put the patties on a pan lined with parchment paper or wax paper. (Image 3-5).

STEP 4: Refrigerate the cakes. Chill the cakes in the refrigerator for 30 minutes to 1 hour before baking.

Steps 5-8 crab cake sandwiches.

STEP 5: Heat the pan. Wait to take the cakes out of the refrigerator until after the large skillet has been heated to medium heat with olive oil added to it. Then, place the crab cakes in the hot and ready pan.

STEP 6: Cook the crab cakes. To cook the cakes, heat them on each side for 3 to 4 minutes until they turn golden brown. Afterward, take them out of the pan and transfer them onto a baking sheet with paper towels. (Image 6-8).

STEP 7:  Create the sandwiches. To prepare the sandwich, simply put all the ingredients together and add your preferred Remoulade sauce on top in soft brioche buns.

Spooning remoulade sauce on top of crab cake for sandwich.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Drain crab meat: Make sure to thoroughly drain the crab meat before mixing it with other ingredients. Excess moisture can make your crab cakes too wet and difficult to hold together.
  • Chill the mixture: Refrigerate the crab cake mixture for at least 30 minutes before forming patties. This allows the flavors to meld together and makes the patties easier to handle.
  • Forming patties: When shaping the crab cakes, avoid over-packing or compressing the mixture too much. Gently form the patties, which will result in a lighter, more tender texture.
  • Size consistency: Make sure your crab cakes are of uniform size and thickness to ensure even cooking.
  • Coat evenly: For a crisp, golden crust, coat the crab cakes evenly with breadcrumbs or panko crumbs before frying.
  • Hot oil: Ensure the oil is hot (around 350°F or 175°C) before adding the crab cakes. This will help them cook evenly and develop a crispy exterior.
  • Avoid overcrowding: Cook the crab cakes in batches if necessary, to prevent overcrowding the pan. Overcrowding can lower the oil temperature and lead to uneven cooking.
  • Gentle flipping: Be gentle when flipping the crab cakes to prevent breaking. Use a wide spatula and turn them only once during the cooking process.
  • Drain excess oil: Place cooked crab cakes on a paper towel-lined plate to absorb any excess oil before assembling your sandwich.
Bite taken out of crab cake sandwich.

Recipe FAQs

Can I use canned crab meat for this recipe?

Yes, you can use canned crab meat as long as you thoroughly drain it to remove excess liquid. Fresh or frozen crab meat can also be used if you prefer.

Can I bake the crab cakes instead of frying them?

Absolutely! To bake the crab cakes, preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C), place the patties on a parchment-lined baking sheet, and bake for about 15-20 minutes or until golden brown, flipping them halfway through.

What type of crab meat is best for crab cakes?

Lump or jumbo lump crab meat works best for crab cakes, as they provide a nice texture and flavor. However, you can also use claw meat or a combination of different types of crab meat.

What to Serve with Crab Cake Sandwiches

A variety of side dishes can complement Crab Cake Sandwiches, adding balance and flavor to your meal. Here are some delicious options to consider:

  1. Coleslaw: A classic pairing with seafood, coleslaw adds a refreshing crunch and tanginess to your meal.
  2. Roasted vegetables: Roasted or grilled veggies like roasted broccoli, asparagus, zucchini, bell peppers, or green beans provide a healthy and tasty accompaniment.
  3. Sweet potato fries: Baked or air-fried sweet potato fries add a touch of sweetness and a different texture to the meal.
  4. Green salad: A simple mixed green salad with a light vinaigrette dressing can help balance out the richness of the crab cakes.
  5. Potato salad: A creamy potato salad or a German-style warm potato salad can be a satisfying addition to your crab cake sandwich experience.
  6. Corn on the cob: Grilled or boiled corn on the cob (or even Instant Pot corn on the cob), seasoned with butter and spices, complements the flavors of the crab cakes nicely.
  7. Cucumber salad: A light and tangy cucumber salad with red onions and dill, or creamy cucumber salad, can provide a refreshing contrast to crab cakes.
  8. Crispy chips: Serve your sandwiches with a side of kettle-cooked potato chips or even some homemade tortilla chips for an extra crunch.
  9. Pasta salad: A cold pasta salad with fresh vegetables, olives, and feta cheese can make for a delightful side dish.
  10. Rice or quinoa: Seasoned rice, pilaf, or quinoa can serve as a delicious and filling accompaniment to your crab cake sandwiches.

Feel free to mix and match these side dishes based on your preferences and the occasion, creating the perfect meal to enjoy alongside your mouth-watering Crab Cake Sandwiches.

Storage

Store leftover cooked crab cakes in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. To reheat, place them in a preheated oven at 350°F (175°C) for about 10 minutes or until heated through.

You can freeze uncooked or cooked crab cakes. Wrap each patty individually in plastic wrap and place them in a freezer-safe container or zip-top bag. They can be stored in the freezer for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight before cooking or reheating.

More Seafood Recipes You’ll Love

The great thing about seafood recipes, is that they can be so versatile for so many recipes. Whether it’s a mussels recipe for an appetizer, a main dish recipe or even a side dish. Here are some of our favorite seafood recipes…

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Crab cake sandwich on white plate.
Print Pin
5 from 4 votes

Crab Cake Sandwich

This crab cake sandwich recipe is easy to make and is delicious with your favorite toppings like a remoulade sauce, and soft buns!
Course Dinner, Lunch
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 8 minutes
Chill Time 30 minutes
Total Time 48 minutes
Servings 4 sandwiches
Calories 1149kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 pound Lump Crab Meat
  • 16 Saltine Crackers Finely Crushed
  • 2 Teaspoons Cajun Seasoning
  • 1 Teaspoon Ground Mustard
  • 1 Teaspoon Dried Basil
  • 2 Eggs Lightly Beaten
  • 4 Tablespoons Mayonnaise
  • 2 Tablespoons Green Onion Sliced
  • 2 Tablespoons Pimento Peppers Drained
  • 1 Lemon Juice and Zest
  • Brioche Buns Toasted with Butter
  • Lettuce
  • Tomato
  • Remoulade Sauce if desired

Instructions

  • Mix: In a medium-sized mixing bowl, gently stir crab, crushed crackers, Cajun seasoning, basil, and mustard powder together; set aside.
  • Egg mixture: In a small bowl, gently beat the egg. Then add green onion, pimentos, lemon juice, and lemon zest, then mix.
  • Combine: Gently combine the egg mixture with the crab mixture. Form into burger-size cakes. About 4 ounces each if making 4. Place patties on a parchment paper or wax paper lined pan.
  • Refrigerate cakes for 30 min to 1 hour before cooking.
  • Prep Oil: Add oil to a nonstick pan over medium heat; do not remove cakes from the refrigerator until the pan is hot and ready to cook.
  • Fry: Cook the cakes on each side for 3 to 4 minutes until golden brown. When done, remove them from the pan and place them on a baking sheet lined with paper towels.
  • Build: Assemble the sandwich and top with your favorite Remoulade sauce.

Notes

Type of Crab: You can use canned crab meat as long as you thoroughly drain it to remove excess liquid. Fresh or frozen crab meat can also be used if you prefer.
To Store Leftover Crab Cakes: Store leftover cooked crab cakes in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. To reheat, place them in a preheated oven at 350°F (175°C) for about 10 minutes or until heated through.

Nutrition

Serving: 1sandwich | Calories: 1149kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 102g | Fat: 58g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 30g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 541mg | Sodium: 4792mg | Potassium: 1503mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 3567IU | Vitamin C: 123mg | Calcium: 346mg | Iron: 10mg

Cold Pasta Salad Recipes

Salad recipes are our FAVORITE around here, so this roundup of cold pasta salad recipes fits right in! 

Whether you need cold pasta salad recipes for a potluck, spring dinner ideas, for a fun picnic food idea, or just looking for a side dish that doesn’t require turning on the oven, here are some of the BEST pasta salad recipes to choose from!

“Pin” your favorites to your favorite board on Pinterest so you have them when you need them!

Post originally published in January 2019, updated in June 2023.

Cold pasta salad recipes collage.

Pasta Salad Recipes

During the warmer months, the last thing you want to do is turn on your oven to make lunch or dinner.

With these cold pasta salad recipes, use a little heat once, and enjoy it for days without turning on the oven!

Here you’ll find some that make the perfect dinner or even a side dish to bring to a party!

Bacon Ranch Pasta Salad

This 6 ingredient bacon ranch pasta salad is so simple and delicious. Perfect for potlucks, barbecues or a weeknight side dish.

A bowl of chicken macaroni salad in a large serving bowl.

Chicken Macaroni Salad

An easy recipe using pasta, mayo, mustard, seasoned salt, pepper, celery, onion, and chicken to create a side dish favorite!

Chicken Caesar Pasta Salad Recipe in a bowl with a cloth

Chicken Caesar Pasta Salad

It may sound odd to put pasta in a lettuce salad but talk about DELICIOUS! You will have a hard time going back to a regular Caesar salad after this one!

Bowls of zesty pasta salad with tomatoes and banana peppers.

Zesty Italian Pasta Salad

This super easy recipe is made using any type of pasta you prefer, a few other simple ingredients, and Zesty Italian dressing!

A large white bowl filled with shrimp pasta salad.

Shrimp Macaroni Salad

The flavors in this shrimp macaroni salad are absolutely amazing and it only uses simple ingredients that you may even already have on hand!

A large white bowl filled with tuna pasta salad.

Tuna Pasta Salad

With easy ingredients and most of them being items that you can keep on hand, and even in the pantry… this recipe is a perfect last-minute option!

Thai Salad Recipe with Noodles and Cabbage

Thai Salad Recipe with Noodles and Cabbage is the perfect way to enjoy all those Thai flavors. Super simple to make and packed full of flavor and texture.

BBQ Pasta Salad with Tuna

This BBQ Pasta Salad with Tuna from My Crazy Good Life is way more exciting than your traditional pasta salad recipe, but with all the flavors of a backyard barbecue.

Pasta salad with green olives in bowl.

Creamy Summer Pasta Salad

With this Creamy Summer Pasta Salad from Fun Food Frolic, you can enjoy all the flavors of summer in one simple meal.

Greek Pasta Salad

This Greek Pasta Salad from The Baking Fairy requires minimal cooking time, so you can have dinner on the table in minutes!

Peach Pasta Salad

This unique Chicken and Peach Pasta Salad from A Magical Mess is bursting with flavor and is the perfect dish to change things up without heating up your home.

Sriracha Shrimp Pasta Salad

This Sriracha Shrimp Pasta Salad from Accidental Happy Baker is so easy to make ahead and is both spicy and fresh!

Primavera Pasta Salad

This quick and easy Primavera Pasta Salad from It Bakes Me Happy is perfect for busy nights, and a break from the traditional pasta salad recipes.

Asparagus Tortellini Pasta Salad

This Asparagus Tortellini Pasta Salad from Who Needs a Cape brings summertime to the table in a unique and veggie filled way!

Broccoli pasta salad in bowl.

Broccoli Seafood Salad

This quick and easy Broccoli Seafood Pasta Salad from Confessions of an Overworked Mom, is so simple to make and perfect for busy days.

Olive pasta salad in bowl.

Tri Colored Pasta Salad

This Tricolor Pasta Salad from Courtney’s Sweets is so easy to make and perfect for picnics or barbecues.

Broccoli Lemon Pasta Salad

This delicious mayo-free Broccoli Lemon Pasta Salad from Home Cooking Memories is perfect for picky eaters who don’t like mayo.

Tortellini Caprese Salad

This delicious Tortellini Caprese Salad Who Needs a Cape has some of the best flavors of summer all in one pasta salad.

A bowl of roasted veggie pasta salad.

Roasted Veggie Pasta Salad

Zucchini, tomatoes, sweet onions and peppers make this filling pasta salad super healthy and easy to make on a busy night.

Vegan Macaroni Salad

This summertime Vegan Macaroni Salad Vegan Huggs is the perfect way to feed those on a special diet, and still enjoy the deliciousness of pasta salad.

More Easy Side Dish Recipes?

You’ll only find delicious and easy recipes here, so get your “pinning” on and fill your Pinterest boards with our recipes for easy meal planning!

Cornbread Salad Recipe

More Recipe Collections

If you love our collections, don’t miss these top favorites:

Tired of Searching for Recipes?

Well if you’re here for the first time, then you’ll want to get your hands on my NEW cookbook, Fabulously Fast Dinners. 

Aren’t you tired of spending hours thinking about what the main dish to make for your family, and then realizing you STILL need a side dish to go with it?

I’ve done all of this for you! An easy and fast main dish recipe, paired with a side dish recipe and even alternative suggestions for sides and desserts along the way!

Dinnertime just got fabulous, and FAST!

Oreo Pancakes

My Oreo Pancakes are the ultimate breakfast indulgence that you won’t be able to resist. Imagine starting your day with the irresistible combination of fluffy pancakes and your favorite cookie – Oreos!

Stacked Oreo pancakes on white plate, with Oreo leaning up against stack.

By blending together the classic flavors of Oreos with simple pancake ingredients, we’ve created a delightful and easy-to-make breakfast recipe that’s perfect for weekend mornings or special occasions.

If you find you have some Oreos left when you’ve made these fluffy Oreo pancakes, why not try making Oreo Cupcakes? Or you could try making a dessert pizza with this Oreo Pizza recipe. Maybe you can keep it simple and make Oreo Mousse or this No Bake Oreo Dessert that works for any occasion.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It uses a few ingredients: With only 6 ingredients, this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand.
  • Great for breakfast or dessert: These pancakes work for a sweet breakfast or as a tasty dessert.
  • Ready in only 20 minutes: Talk about a quick and easy pancake recipe! This recipe, from start to finish, only takes 20 minutes to cook.

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients on marble counter for Oreo pancakes.
  • Flour – Use a simple white flour for this recipe to get the best results.
  • Baking powder – Make sure you add this so that your pancakes are light and fluffy.
  • Vanilla extract – Add just a little vanilla extract to balance out the chocolate flavor of the Oreos.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Vanilla Extract: If you don’t have any vanilla extract in your pantry, you can use almond extract or maple syrup for a slightly different, but still delicious, flavor profile. Alternatively, try adding a pinch of cinnamon or nutmeg to bring warmth and depth to your pancakes.
  • Oreos: Can’t find Oreo cookies or want to try something new? Swap them out for any chocolate sandwich cookie or even crumbled chocolate chip cookies. You could also experiment with flavored Oreos, such as Golden Oreos or Mint Oreos, to put a unique spin on your pancakes.
  • Salted Butter: If you only have unsalted butter, simply add a pinch of salt to your pancake batter to achieve the same balanced taste. You could also use coconut oil or margarine as a dairy-free alternative.
  • Whole Milk: There are plenty of options if you need to replace whole milk. Try using 2% milk, almond milk, or soy milk for a lighter texture. For an ultra-rich and creamy pancake, opt for half-and-half or a mixture of milk and heavy cream.

Variations

  • Red Velvet Oreo Pancakes: Add a touch of romance to your pancakes by turning them into Red Velvet Oreo Pancakes. Simply mix in 2 tablespoons of unsweetened cocoa powder and a few drops of red food coloring to your pancake batter. This vibrant twist on the classic Oreo Pancake is perfect for special occasions, like Valentine’s Day or anniversaries, and is sure to leave everyone swooning.
  • Oreo Pancakes with Peanut Butter Swirl: If you’re a fan of the heavenly combination of chocolate and peanut butter, this variation is for you! Before cooking each pancake, swirl in a spoonful of melted peanut butter on top of the batter in the pan, creating a marbled effect. The result? A mouthwatering fusion of flavors that will have you reaching for seconds (or thirds!).
  • S’mores Oreo Pancakes: Bring the taste of the great outdoors to your breakfast table with S’mores Oreo Pancakes. To create this campfire-inspired treat, sprinkle a handful of mini marshmallows and crushed graham crackers over the pancake batter just before flipping. Finish off with a drizzle of chocolate syrup, and you’ll have a stack of pancakes that transports you straight to a cozy bonfire under the stars.

How to Make Oreo Pancakes

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-4 collage for making Oreo pancakes.

STEP 1: Mix the dry ingredients: In a medium-sized bowl, mix the flour, crushed Oreos, and baking soda. (Image 1).

Tip: If you can, leave the batter for 5-10 minutes before you start cooking.

STEP 2: Add in the wet ingredients: Stir the milk, vanilla extract, and melted butter into the pancake batter until there are no lumps of dry ingredients left. (Image 2-3).

Stacked Oreo pancakes on white plate.

STEP 3: Cook the pancakes: To cook pancakes, first melt a small amount of butter in a skillet over medium-high heat. Next, pour approximately ⅓ cup of batter onto the skillet and cook each side for approximately 2 minutes. (Image 4).

STEP 4: Make the batch: Proceed with this step until you have utilized the entire batter. Afterward, serve and enjoy your pancakes while they are warm!

Stacked Oreo pancakes with whipped cream and an Oreo cookie leaning next to them.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Gently fold in crushed Oreos: To ensure your pancakes have just the right amount of Oreo goodness in each bite, gently fold crushed Oreos into the batter instead of vigorously mixing them. This will help maintain the fluffy texture of your pancakes while evenly distributing the cookie pieces.
  • Preheat your pan and adjust heat as needed: Start by preheating your pan over medium heat and use a small amount of oil or butter to lightly grease the surface. If you notice that your pancakes are browning too quickly, simply lower the heat to prevent burning. Finding the perfect temperature is key to achieving golden-brown, perfectly cooked Oreo Pancakes.
  • Rest the pancake batter: Let your pancake batter rest for about 5-10 minutes before cooking if you can. This allows the flour to fully hydrate and the baking soda to start reacting, resulting in tender, fluffy pancakes that are sure to impress.

Recipe FAQs

Can I make the Oreo Pancakes ahead of time and reheat them later?

Yes, you can! Simply cook your pancakes as usual, then allow them to cool completely. Once cooled, store them in an airtight container or wrap them in plastic wrap. When you’re ready to enjoy, reheat them in the microwave, toaster oven, or on a skillet over low heat until warmed through.

What is the secret to perfect pancakes?

The secret to perfect pancakes lies in a few key factors: using the right batter consistency, preheating your pan to the ideal temperature, and flipping the pancakes at the right time. For batter consistency, aim for a thick but pourable texture; if it’s too thin, add a bit more flour, and if it’s too thick, add a splash of milk. Preheat your pan over medium heat and adjust as needed to prevent burning. Finally, flip your pancakes when the edges are set and bubbles appear on the surface.

Can I use a different type of cookie instead of Oreos for this recipe?

Absolutely! Feel free to experiment with different types of cookies to create your own unique pancake flavors. Chocolate chip cookies, sandwich cookies, or even gingersnaps could all make delicious alternatives. Just remember to crush the cookies into small pieces for even distribution in the batter.

Is it possible to make these Oreo Pancakes gluten-free or dairy-free?

Yes, you can easily adapt this recipe for dietary preferences. For a gluten-free version, use a gluten-free all-purpose flour blend and gluten-free cookies. To make dairy-free Oreo Pancakes, replace the milk with a dairy-free alternative like almond or soy milk, and use a dairy-free butter substitute or coconut oil in place of the butter.

Oreo pancakes, stacked on white plate with whipped cream.

What to Serve with Oreo Pancakes

When it comes to serving your scrumptious Oreo Pancakes, the possibilities are as endless as your imagination! To elevate your pancake experience and make every bite even more delectable, consider these tantalizing toppings and accompaniments:

  • Whipped Cream: A generous dollop of whipped cream adds a cloud-like, velvety texture that perfectly complements the rich Oreo flavors. You can use store-bought whipped cream or whip up your own at home for an extra touch of freshness.
  • Chocolate Syrup Drizzle: For the ultimate chocolate lover’s dream, drizzle your Oreo Pancakes with a silky ribbon of chocolate sauce. This delightful addition will create a beautiful presentation and enhance the overall chocolatey goodness.
  • Fresh Fruit: The easiest way to balance out the indulgence of your pancakes by adding some fresh fruit to your plate. Sliced strawberries, bananas, or a handful of vibrant berries will not only add a pop of color but also provide a refreshing contrast to the richness of the Oreos.
  • Powdered Sugar Dusting: For a touch of elegance and a hint of extra sweetness, lightly dust your Oreo Pancakes with powdered sugar. This simple yet sophisticated finishing touch will make your breakfast feel like a gourmet treat.

Storage

For short-term storage (up to 2 days), place the stacked pancakes in an airtight container or a resealable ziploc bag, and store them in the refrigerator.

For longer storage (up to 2 months), tightly wrap the stack of pancakes in plastic wrap or aluminum foil, then place them in a resealable freezer-safe plastic bag. Be sure to squeeze out any excess air and seal the bag tightly before storing it in the freezer.

When you’re ready to savor your leftover Oreo Pancakes, reheat them in the microwave, toaster oven, or on a skillet over low heat until warmed through. If reheating from frozen, let the pancakes thaw at room temperature for about 10 minutes before reheating to ensure even warming.

More Pancake Recipes You’ll Love

Want to experiment more with pancakes? Then here are some ideas to try. First, you can try these Amazing Fluffy Pancakes which are a great way to have simple regular pancakes for any occasion. Then try a simple classic such as Easy Blueberry Pancakes that you can make for breakfast or dessert. Finally, you can try something a little different such as these Pumpkin White Chocolate Pancakes for a seasonal treat.

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Stacked Oreo pancakes on white plate, topped with whipped cream.
Print Pin
5 from 1 vote

Oreo Pancakes

These Oreo pancakes are a sweet treat for breakfast and brunch or just for a fun midnight snack!
Course Breakfast, Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 12 pancakes
Calories 266kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 2 cups white flour
  • 20 Oreos crushed
  • 4 teaspoons baking powder
  • 2 ¼ cups whole milk
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • ½ cup salted butter melted

Instructions

  • Batter ingredients: Combine the flour, crushed Oreos, and baking soda in a medium sized bowl.
  • Mix: Whisk in the milk, vanilla extract, and melted butter until no clumps of dry ingredients remain in the pancake batter.
  • Cook: Heat a small amount of butter in a skillet on medium high heat. Pour about ⅓ cup of batter onto the skillet and cook both sides for about 2 minutes.
  • Repeat: Continue this process until you have used all of the batter. Serve!

Notes

  • You can store these pancakes in the fridge for about 5 days. Alternatively, you can freeze these pancakes for up to 3 months. Simply reheat the pancakes in the microwave when you are ready to eat them.
  • These pancakes are great served by themselves or with whipped cream and a drizzle of chocolate syrup.
  • Because you leave the creamy Oreo filling in the recipe, there is no need to add extra sugar to the pancake batter.

Nutrition

Serving: 1pancake | Calories: 266kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 26mg | Sodium: 157mg | Potassium: 275mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 311IU | Calcium: 124mg | Iron: 3mg

Oreo Brookies

Oreo Brookies: This tasty treat combines chocolate chip cookies, a fudgy brownie, and Oreo cookies! These cookie-brownie hybrids are a dessert lover’s dream!

The moment I fell in love with Oreo Rice Crispy Treats and Oreo Dip, I know more Oreo recipes had to be here for you. Combine that with the love of brownies and cookies… oh my gosh, get ready!

Originally published in January 2022, updated in June 2023.

Oreo Brookies stacked on top of one another.

Why You’ll Love This Oreo Brookie Recipe

I love fusion recipes. If you can take one thing I love and somehow combine it with something else I love, you win! Like our Oreo Pancakes and Bronuts… this recipe combines the best cookie with the best breakfast item. (In our opinion!)

These brookies with Oreos manage to do that on three fronts- the combination of a brownie, chocolate chip cookie, AND Oreo cookie is something magical. (Kind of like in the layered chocolate peanut butter brownies that you all love and the two layers in these cornflake brownies!)

Chocolate lovers and cookie lovers alike will both love this easy brookie recipe!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

What is a brookie?

Before we tell you how to make one, I guess we should explain exactly what we’re talking about.

“Brookie” simply refers to a recipe that combines brownies and cookies together in one pan. There have been many variations of this idea in the past, but we’re pretty excited about our version!

Read on to see all the goodness we have to share…

Hand holding Oreo Brookies.
Brownie, Oreo and cookie layers.

Ingredients for this Brookie recipe with Oreos

You’re essentially making two separate recipes here and sandwiching some Oreos between them. Here’s what you’ll need…

  • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened
  • ½ cup brown sugar
  • 1 egg
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 ¼ cups all purpose flour
  • ½ teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 cup chocolate chips

Oreo Layer

  • 16 Oreo cookies

Brownie Layer

  • ½ cup semi-sweet chocolate chips
  • ½ cup unsalted butter
  • 2 eggs
  • ¼ cup brown sugar
  • 3 tablespoons white sugar
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • ¼ cup all purpose flour
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ cup unsweetened cocoa powder

Toppings

  • 5 Oreos, roughly chopped
  • ¼ cup chocolate chips (some melted for drizzle on ice cream)
Ingredients for Brookies.
Ingredients

How to Make Oreo Brookies

  1. Line a 9×9 inch square baking pan with parchment paper and spray the parchment with non stick cooking spray.

Chocolate Chip Cookie Layer

  1. Beat the butter and sugar until it is light and fluffy in a large bowl or the bowl of a stand mixer. 
First ingredients in mixing bowl for Oreo brookies.
Cream butter & sugar.
  1. Once that’s nice and fluffy, add the egg and vanilla extract to the sugar mixture and beat again until smooth.
Eggs and vanilla added to mixing bowl.
Add eggs & vanilla, beat.
  1. Add the flour and baking soda and mix until combined.
Flour and baking soda added to mixing bowl.
Add flour & baking soda, mix.
  1. Dump in the chocolate chips and fold into the cookie dough with a spatula.
Chocolate chips added in to mixing bowl.
Fold in choc chips.
  1. Transfer the cookie dough into the lined baking pan. Use your hands to press it down into the bottom of the prepared pan in an even layer (anything else you try to use will get stuck). 
  2. Put the pan into the freezer for 20 minutes (if you don’t have room in the freezer you can put the pan into the refrigerator while you make the brownie batter). Meanwhile, heat oven to 350 degrees f.
Pressed cookie dough in pan.
Press into pan.

Brownie Batter Layer

  1. Put the butter and the chocolate in a microwave safe small or medium bowl. Microwave for short, 30 second bursts in the microwave, stirring well each time, until they are melted (it should only take a minute or two). 
  2. Add the eggs and sugar into a large bowl and whisk them until they are thick and frothy. 
Eggs and sugar added to mixing bowl.
Add eggs & sugar to bowl.
  1. Pour the melted butter and chocolate mixture to the large mixing bowl along with the vanilla extract. Use a rubber spatula to fold it all together in large looping movements. 
Add melted butter and chocolate to sugar mixture.
Add chocolate mixture to bowl.
  1. Add the flour, salt and cocoa powder. Fold into the mixture gently with the spatula, taking care not to over mix.
Add flour, salt and cocoa powder and fold together.
Add flour, salt and cocoa.

Assembling

  1. Take the cold cookie layer out of the freezer. Arrange 16 Oreos on top of the cookie base then pour over the brownie mixture. Use a spatula to spread out the brownie batter so that it’s even. 
Layer Oreo cookies over top of the cookie dough layer.
Add Oreos.
Spread brownie layer on top of Oreo cookie layer.
Pour brownie batter over.
  1. Scatter chopped Oreos and chocolate chips over the top of the brownie batter. 
Sprinkle chopped Oreos and chocolate chips on top.
Add toppings & bake.
  1. Bake in the center of the preheated oven for 35-40 minutes or until a toothpick inserted into the middle comes out mostly clean.
  2. Allow to cool in the pan for a couple of hours before removing and slicing into 16 equal squares.
  3. Serve with vanilla ice cream and a drizzle of melted chocolate.
Drizzling chocolate sauce on top of ice cream covered Oreo Brookies.
Drizzle chocolate on top- YUM!

🛒 Substitutions

A few of the ingredients in this recipe can easily be changed.

  • Brown Sugar – You can substitute the brown sugar in this recipe for all white sugar if you prefer.
  • Chocolate Chips – We used a mixture or semi-sweet and milk chocolate chips. You can use whichever you prefer – white chocolate chips also work well.
  • White Sugar – you can use all brown or all white sugar in the brownie layer but we think brownies taste better with a mixture of both!

📖 Variations

Since we have three different parts of this recipe, we have three fun areas we can create variety in!

  • Brownie Layer – Mix things up and make something other than a fudge chocolate brownie for this layer! Maybe something like a strawberry brownie!
  • Oreo Layer – Oreo cookies come in a LOT of flavors these days, and each one would change the finished result of this recipe. So many possibilities!
  • Chocolate Chip Cookie Dough Layer – you could switch up the type of chocolate chip in the dough to create a slightly different cookie base for these cookie brownies. You could even try something like butterscotch chips or peanut butter chips!
Oreo Brookies on parchment paper.
Oreo Brookies

Storage

Store your Oreo brookies in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 4 days. If you refrigerate them, these Oreo brookies (aka slutty brownies…cheeky, we know) can last for a week or longer, just bring them to room temperature before eating for the best experience. 

Expert Tips and FAQs

Oreo Brookies, sliced in to squares on pink surface.
Which kind of Oreo cookies should I use in these brookies?

We used double stuff Oreos to get a really thick Oreo layer but any type of Oreos will work in this recipe. You can use the original cookies or get creative and use some of their fun new flavors!

Could I use a boxed brownie mix and pre-made cookie dough for this recipe?

You sure could! If you are short on time, you could definitely substitute the chocolate chip cookie dough and brownie batter in this recipe for quicker, store-bought versions.

How do you reheat brookies?

If you are storing these brookies in the fridge, you can just let them sit on the counter until they are room temperature.

If you like a warm, gooey brookie though you could reheat them in the oven. Heat the oven to 350°F again and pop your brookie in on a cookie sheet for a few minutes until it’s warm.

If you liked these Oreo brookies, check out some of the other fun Oreo recipes on the blog like these easy Oreo cupcakes or this quick no-bake Oreo dessert!

Or if you’re a fan of brownies as much as we are, you’ll especially love these:

Recipe

Oreo Brookies
Print Pin
5 from 11 votes

Oreo Brookies Recipe

Oreo Brookies: This tasty treat combines chocolate chip cookies, fudgy brownie, and Oreo cookies! These cookie-brownie hybrids are a dessert lovers dream!
Course Dessert, Snack
Cuisine American
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 16 squares
Calories 324kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

Chocolate Chip Cookie Layer

  • ½ cup unsalted butter softened
  • ½ cup brown sugar
  • 1 egg
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 ¼ cups all purpose flour
  • ½ teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 cup chocolate chips

Oreo Layer

  • 16 Oreos

Brownie Batter Layer

  • ½ cup semi-sweet chocolate chips
  • ½ cup unsalted butter
  • 2 eggs
  • ¼ cup brown sugar
  • 3 tablespoons white sugar
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • ¼ cup all purpose flour
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ cup unsweetened cocoa powder

Toppings

  • 5 Oreos roughly chopped
  • ¼ cup chocolate chips (some melted for drizzle on ice cream)

Instructions

  • Line a 9×9 inch square baking pan with parchment paper and spray the parchment with non stick cooking spray.

Chocolate Chip Cookie Layer

  • Beat the butter and sugar until it is light and fluffy in a large bowl or the bowl of a stand mixer.
  • Once that's nice and fluffy, add the egg and vanilla extract to the sugar mixture and beat again until smooth.
  • Add the flour and baking soda and mix until combined.
  • Dump in the chocolate chips and fold into the cookie dough with a spatula.
  • Transfer the cookie dough into the lined baking pan. Use your hands to press it down into the bottom of the prepared pan in an even layer (anything else you try to use will get stuck).
  • Put the pan into the freezer for 20 minutes (if you don’t have room in the freezer you can put the pan into the refrigerator while you make the brownie batter). Meanwhile, heat oven to 350 degrees f.

Brownie Batter Layer

  • Put the butter and the chocolate in a microwave safe small or medium bowl. Microwave for short, 30 second bursts in the microwave, stirring well each time, until they are melted (it should only take a minute or two).
  • Add the eggs and sugar into a large bowl and whisk them until they are thick and frothy.
  • Pour the melted butter and chocolate mixture to the large mixing bowl along with the vanilla extract. Use a rubber spatula to fold it all together in large looping movements.
  • Add the flour, salt and cocoa powder. Fold into the mixture gently with the spatula, taking care not to over mix.

Assembling

  • Take the cold cookie layer out of the freezer. Arrange 16 Oreos on top of the cookie base then pour over the brownie mixture. Use a spatula to spread out the brownie batter so that it's even.
  • Scatter chopped Oreos and chocolate chips over the top of the brownie batter.
  • Bake in the center of the preheated oven for 35-40 minutes or until a toothpick inserted into the middle comes out mostly clean.
  • Allow to cool in the pan for a couple of hours before removing and slicing into 16 equal squares.
  • Serve with vanilla ice cream and a drizzle of melted chocolate.

Notes

NOTES:
  • We used a mixture or semi-sweet and milk chocolate chips. You can use whichever you prefer – white chocolate chips also work well.
  • You can substitute the brown sugar in this recipe for all white sugar if you prefer.
  • Likewise, you can use all brown or all white sugar in the brownie layer but we think brownies taste better with a mixture of both!
     
STORAGE: Store your Oreo brookies in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 4 days. If you refrigerate them, these Oreo brookies (aka slutty brownies…cheeky, we know) can last for a week or longer, just bring them to room temperature before eating for the best experience. 

Nutrition

Serving: 1square | Calories: 324kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 52mg | Sodium: 158mg | Potassium: 124mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 23g | Vitamin A: 394IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 3mg

25+ Easy Air Fryer Recipes for Beginners

Air Fryer Recipes: A collection of easy recipes for the air fryer for fish, chicken, pork, and more for beginners with an air fryer.

Air fryer recipes collage and text overlay.

Air Fryer Recipes

If you are trying to cut back on the amount of oil you consume, an air fryer is a great option! I’m going to assume that you have an air fryer, but if not, head over to find out WHICH air fryer I chose after researching and looking for the very best, in my Air Fryer Reviews post!

What is an Air Fryer?

Air fryers allow you to still enjoy delicious fried foods, but without all the oil that comes with traditional frying!

If you have never used an air fryer before, the concept can sometimes be a little tricky. Whether you are looking for a dessert, quick lunch, or dinner, the possibilities of what you can make are endless!

25+ Air Fryer Recipes

A plate of fried shrimp with cocktail sauce and a lemon wedge.

Air Fryer Fried Shrimp with Cocktail Sauce

Shrimp with cocktail sauce is always a good idea. This recipe makes a favorite dish a little lighter by air frying it.

Eggplant fries with red sauce.

Eggplant Fries

Make fries from eggplant for a crispy and delicious way to add more veggies to your day. This recipe is so tasty that everyone will want seconds of this easy dish. One of our favorite ways to cook eggplants.

A platter with butternut squash cubes.

Air Fryer Butternut Squash

Make this easy air fryer butternut squash for an easy side everyone will love. This healthy option cooks in no time for tender and tasty flavor that compliments fall meals perfectly.

Air fryer apples in a bowl, that are coated in cinnamon.

Air Fryer Apple Chips

Make an easy and healthy snack that the whole family can enjoy with these apple chips. Make these for a crunchy and flavorful treat that packs well in lunches, or hits the spot as you snack while watching your shows at night.

Glazed apple fritters on a wire cooling rack.


Air Fryer Apple Fritters

No need to head to the bakery to get the fritter flavor you crave. You can make them in the air fryer for a healthier take on a breakfast classic.

A plate stacked with venison meat.

Air Fryer Venison

If you want to make the best deer meat, you need to cook it in the air fryer. It turns out so tender and flavorful for a family meal everyone will enjoy.

Salmon patties with cucumbers and lemons on a plate.

Air Fryer Salmon Patties

Salmon patties make for a great dinner to make in your air fryer. This method is easy and has the best crunch!

Crispy tofu on a toothpick.

Crispy Air Fryer Tofu

Make this super crispy tofu in your air fryer for a 12 minute dish that everyone will want a second bite of.

A platter of buns and air fried brats.

Air Fryer Brats

You can get great brat flavor without firing up the grill! This method cooks them in the air fryer for a fast and fuss free dinner option you can serve with sweet potato fries.

A plate of crispy air fryer chicken legs.

Air Fried Chicken Legs

Skip the greasy mess of frying chicken legs. You can coat them and pop them in the air fryer for a fast and budget friendly dinner.

Loaded turkey burgers on a white plate.

Baked Turkey Burgers

Pop these healthy and lean patties into the air fryer for a juicy turkey burger that tastes amazing and cooks in a flash.

Air fryer asparagus

Air Fryer Asparagus

If you like crispy and crunchy asparagus, you are going to love it made in the air fryer. This is an easy and delicious side dish idea to go with so many meals.

A plate of air fryer chicken wings.

Air Fryer Chicken Wings

Frozen wings come out of the freezer, and into the air fryer to make such a great appetizer, snack or addition to dinner.

A plate of air fryer roasted potatoes.

Air Fryer Potatoes

If you have potatoes, a few seasonings and some olive oil you can make this easy side that goes well with most proteins.

Slices of air fried turkey breast on a plate.

Air Fryer Turkey Breast

Get juicy turkey breast on the table for a satisfying meal. This recipe cooks in the air fryer for a fuss free method that is done in a flash.

A plate of air fryer potatoes.

Air Fryer Breakfast Potatoes

Get home fry flavor on the table without having to fry on the stovetop. This method cooks potatoes in the air fryer for a hearty addition to your morning that everyone will enjoy.

A plate with bacon strips.

Air Fryer Bacon

Did you know you can make the crispiest bacon in your air fryer? You are going to love that this fast and fuss free method can be replicated by anyone with an air fryer.

A plate with pigs in a blanket stacked on it.

Air Fryer Pigs in a Blanket

Wrap some little franks in dough and make a classic dinner like pigs in a blanket. The whole family will enjoy these easy air fryer treats.

A stack of melty s’mores from the air fryer.

Air Fryer S’mores

Make these s’mores in the air fryer for a fast way to get your sweet treat cravings cured without having to start a bonfire.

A plate with hash browns, eggs and bacon.

Air Fryer Hash Browns

Make these hash browns in the air fryer for a fast addition to breakfast that fills you up with great flavor.

A platter of air fryer tilapia with lemon wedges.

Air Fryer Tilapia

Tilapia makes for such an easy air fryer meal. Make this with a salad and some crusty bread for a fast and filling dinner option. You will love how easy tilapia is to make in the air fryer.

A casserole with cinnamon rolls with icing.

Air Fryer Cinnamon Rolls

Did you know you can make cinnamon rolls in the air fryer? This is perfect for a fast and flaky breakfast or dessert that everyone will love with a glass of milk or coffee.

Tater tots with tomatoes, jalapenos and cheese.

Loaded Tater Tots

If you like tots with your meals, you are going to want to make this easy air fryer recipe asap. It is loaded with all of the best toppings for a side that you could totally make a meal of if you like.

A platter of air fryer cheeseburgers.

Air Fryer Burgers

Make burgers the easiest way. Cooked in the air fryer, they turn out with such a juicy flavor that will pair great with a salad, or some fries.

Garlic bread cooked in an air fryer.

Frozen Garlic Bread

Get buttery garlic bread on the table for a good side dish  in just a few minutes. You don’t have to fire up the oven to get the flavor, you can use your air fryer!

Do you have favorite recipes for an air fryer? Share them right here in the comments below so we can add them to the list!

Need a New Air Fryer?

My favorite air fryer, by FAR is the Bella air fryer! But I’ve also tried out the Cosori Toaster Oven Air Fryer and although it is a different style of air fryer than I prefer, it was a great small appliance too!

You’ll Also Love These Fried Recipes:

Although they’re not air-fried recipes, these fried recipes on the blog are favorites!

Love Our Recipe Collections?

If you love these easy recipe ideas, you’ll love these other collections where we’ve gathered some of the best:

Browse more of the easy recipes here on Fantabulosity, and pin them on Pinterest for later so you’re armed and ready for dinnertime!

Easy Red Skin Potato Salad

Red Skin Potato Salad: Potato salad is a classic summer dish that has been enjoyed for generations. It’s easy to prepare and can be served as the perfect side dish recipe or as a main course recipe.

Along with our Amish potato salad, one of the most popular variations of potato salad is this easy red skin potato salad, and it’s easy to make and full of flavor!

Red skin potato salad in large white serving bowl with wooden spoon.

This creamy potato salad dish is known for its texture, tangy flavor, and vibrant colors. This easy recipe is not only a great option for summer cookouts but it makes a delicious recipe to have on hand all year long to serve along with dishes like baked pork steaks or even when you’re baking bratwursts in the oven. The best part is the extra boost of vitamins you get from the creamy red potatoes.

Origins of Red Skin Potato Salad

Red skin potatoes are native to South America and were introduced to North America in the early 1800s. They quickly became popular due to their rich flavor and nutritional value. Red skin potato salad has its roots in Southern cuisine, where it was a staple at backyard barbecues and family gatherings.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It uses a few ingredients: With only 8 simple ingredients, this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand.
  • Make-ahead recipe: Did you know that you can make this recipe in advance if you want to? It’s true, see my tips below on how to do that!
  • Ready in only 30 minutes: Talk about a quick and easy dinner idea! This recipe, from start to finish, only takes a half an hour.

Red skin potatoes are a good source of potassium, Vitamin C, and fiber. They also have a lower glycemic index than other types of potatoes, which means they won’t cause a spike in blood sugar levels. 

Hard-boiled eggs add protein and richness to the red skin potato salad recipe, while celery and red onion provide a crunch and tangy flavor.

Ingredients Needed

The key ingredients in this classic potato salad dish are red skin potatoes, hard-boiled eggs, celery, red onion, and mayonnaise.

Labeled ingredients on counter for red skin potato salad.
  • Broth – The broth gives the red-skinned potatoes an extra kick of flavor that’s perfect for your family dinner. You can make my easy chicken broth for this recipe too!
  • Pickle Relish – Although we used dill pickle relish for our recipe, you can substitute sweet pickle relish if you prefer and sweet and tangy version of the dish.
  • Potatoes – Red potatoes are the star of this potato salad. Dice them into similar sizes for even cooking.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Tofu – if you’re short on eggs, you can use tofu in this recipe instead.
  • Potatoes – you can use russet potatoes or even Yukon gold potatoes in place of red potatoes if you prefer. Or, if you’re doing low carb, you may also like using cauliflower, like we did in our cauliflower potato salad.

How to Make Creamy Red Potato Salad

Although there are many variations of potatoes and recipes for the dish, this is our family’s favorite way to serve the delicious potato salad.

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

You’ll start your side dish recipe by washing and cutting your red potatoes into bite-size pieces. 

Steps 1-4 for how to make red skin potato salad.

STEP 1. Dice the potatoes. Cut red potatoes into bite-size pieces. (Image 1).

Tip: If you’re in a hurry, I suggest making the hard-boiled eggs and cubed, cooked potatoes the day before and set them in the refrigerator overnight until you need them.

STEP 2. Add the eggs & potatoes. Place the diced potatoes in a large pot, if using raw eggs place the eggs in the pot on top of the potatoes (Image 2).

STEP 3. Add broth. Add all of the broth to the pot. If it does not cover the potatoes and eggs, add water until covered. You may need to wiggle the eggs down into the potatoes (Image 3).

Steps 5-8 for how to make red skinned potato salad.

STEP 4. Cook. Boil the potatoes and eggs until the potatoes are fork-tender and eggs are done. 25-30 min. 

STEP 5. Drain. When the potatoes and eggs are done remove the eggs from the pot. Drain the hot potatoes and return them to the pot (Image 4). 

STEP 6: Peel and dice the eggs. Set the diced hard-boiled eggs aside.

STEP 7. Make the sauce. While the potatoes are boiling make the sauce. In a medium mixing bowl, add the mayonnaise (Image 5), mustard, relish, onion, salt, and pepper (Image 6); stir well to mix (Image 7).

STEP 8. Add the sauce. While the potatoes are still hot, add the sauce to the potatoes, stirring well (Image 8).

Sliced egg added to potato salad in pot.

STEP 9. Add Eggs. Then fold in the diced eggs.

Potatoes mixed with egg, creamy mixture and green onion in white stock pot.

STEP 10. Garnish. Sprinkle with green onions to garnish if desired, and serve from the pot or in a large bowl.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Make ahead of time. You can make the side dish the day before you’re serving it to let the flavors incorporate fully.
  • Add flavor. To add extra flavor to the salad, you can add chopped fresh herbs like parsley, dill, or chives. You can also substitute Greek yogurt for some or all of the mayonnaise to make a lighter version of the dish.
  • Try different toppings. Additionally, you can add other ingredients like bacon, pickles, or roasted red peppers to customize the salad to your liking.

Recipe FAQs

What are red-skinned potatoes?

Red skin potatoes, also called new potatoes, are small potatoes with thin red skins. They have a slightly sweet, earthy flavor and creamy texture.

Do I need to peel the potatoes for potato salad?

No, you don’t need to peel red skin potatoes since their thin skins are edible. However, if you prefer a smoother texture, you can peel the potatoes before cooking. 

Are red or white potatoes better for potato salad?

Both types of potatoes can be used for potato salad, but red skin potatoes tend to hold up better during cooking and have a slightly sweeter flavor than other types of potatoes.

Can I boil potatoes for potato salad the night before?

Yes, you can boil potatoes for potato salad the night before. Just make sure to cool them quickly in an ice bath and refrigerate until ready to use.

What to Serve with Red Potato Salad

Red skin potato salad in white serving bowl.

❄️ Storage

  • Leftovers: Store red potato salad in an airtight container in the refrigerator to avoid accumulating water from condensation. 
  • How long: Potato salad will keep in the refrigerator for up to five days when stored in an airtight container. To prevent spoilage, make sure to cool the salad completely before storing it.
  • Can I freeze potato salad? No, you should not freeze potato salad as it will become watery and mushy when thawed.
Wooden spoon holding serving of red skin potato salad.

Red skin potato salad is a classic summer dish that’s easy to prepare and bursting with flavor. With a few simple ingredients and some basic cooking skills, you can create a perfect potato salad dish that’s sure to impress your friends and family.

Serving of red skin potato salad on white plate.

So next time you’re looking for a tasty and nutritious side dish, give this recipe a try! It’s sure to become your new favorite potato salad this summer!

Bite of red skin potato salad on fork, holding above plate.

🥗 More Salad Recipes You’ll Love

If you’re looking for similar dishes, we think you’ll also love these salad recipes or even pasta salad recipes that are popular:

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Close up of red skin potato salad in white bowl, with wooden spoon.
Print Pin
5 from 5 votes

Red Skin Potato Salad

Easy to make and big on taste, you'll love this delicious red-skinned potato salad dish!
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 10 Servings
Calories 376kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 3 pounds Red Potatoes
  • 6 Eggs Raw or Boiled
  • 4 cups Chicken Broth
  • 1 ½ cups Mayonnaise
  • 2 Tablespoons Coarse Dijon Mustard
  • ⅓ cup Pickle Relish
  • ¼ cup Green Onions Sliced
  • 1 teaspoons Salt
  • ½ teaspoons Black Pepper

Instructions

  • Wash and cut red potatoes into bite-size pieces.
  • Place diced potatoes in a large pot, if using raw eggs place the eggs in the pot on top of the potatoes. Add all of the broth to the pot. If it does not cover the potatoes and eggs, add water until covered. You may need to wiggle the eggs down into the potatoes.
  • Boil the potatoes and eggs until potatoes are fork tender and eggs are done. 25-30 min.
  • While the potatoes are boiling make the sauce. In a medium mixing bowl, add the mayonnaise, mustard, relish, onion, salt, and pepper; stir well to mix.
  • When the potatoes and eggs are done remove the eggs from the pot
  • Drain the potatoes and return them to the pot.
  • Peel and dice the eggs.
  • While the potatoes are still hot, add the sauce to the potatoes, stirring well.
  • Then fold in the diced eggs. Sprinkle with green onions to garnish if desired.
  • Serve from the pot or in a serving bowl.
  • Refrigerate any leftovers. 

Notes

  1. I tested the recipe with sweet pickle relish but it would taste great with dill relish as well.
  2. Chicken bouillon mixed with water (follow package instructions to make 4 cups) would work if you do not have chicken broth. 
  3. You can make this recipe up to a day ahead.
  4. Store leftovers in the refrigerator for up to five days.
  5. Since this contains mayonnaise I do not recommend letting it sit out for more than an hour or two.

Nutrition

Serving: 0.5c | Calories: 376kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 16g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 114mg | Sodium: 946mg | Potassium: 694mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 215IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 2mg

25 Apple Salad Recipes: Side Dishes, Desserts + More!

Whether you’re looking for a side dish, dessert, or even salad recipes to use with apples, I think you’ll love these apple salad recipes that I’ve gathered for you!

In the Fall, it’s easy to have a plentiful supply of apples, but the lovely part of recipes using apples is that apples can be found all year long to help keep your kitchen full of yummy recipes so these ideas should come in handy no matter when you’re finding them!

Post originally published in August 2018, updated in May 2023.

Collage of apple salad recipes with text overlay.

Here you’ll find salads with apples, dessert dishes, and side dishes that are perfect for dinner or even to make for the potluck gathering that you’re attending soon!

25 Apple Salad Recipes

Cool Whip Fruit Salad  

This fruity salad has the best cool and creamy dressing. Use cool whip and canned fruit with marshmallows. Add some fresh apples to give this salad a crispy texture that is delicious.

Apple Raspberry Spring Mix

Add berries and apples to  a simple spring mix for a fruity twist on a classic. You can make a meal of this or serve it on the side.

Apple Salad with a Creamy Yogurt and Pudding Dressing

The creamy yogurt and pudding dressing combined with the crunchiness of apples is a combo that’s hard to resist.

Snickers Apple Salad

This dessert salad has so much going for it! It has apples to make it a little healthier, but it has plenty of Snickers candy mixed in to keep it sweet and delicious!

Pecan apple salad on plate next to fork and napkin.

Harvest Chicken Salad

Adding chicken and apples to a salad is one way to make for a fulfilling and healthy meal. This has a great combination of ingredients for unbeatable texture and flavor.

Spinach Salad with Apple

This apple salad has crunchy apples and nuts, and creamy cheese and healthy greens for a great meal.

Arugula Apple Salad

This simple salad is so satisfying! Make this with apples and arugula and be sure to add goat cheese and walnuts for texture and flavor.

Shaved Brussels Sprouts Salad

Shaved brussels sprouts and apples make such a good combination for a healthy salad. Serve this for lunch or dinner that hits the spot and doesn’t weigh you down.

grapes, apples, and walnuts atop greens

Blue Cheese, Grape and Apple Salad

Blue cheese, apples and grapes are such a good combination for a salad. Make this to enjoy for lunch, or serve it with grilled meat for dinner.

Chicken Apple Salad

Chicken and apples go together great in this easy and tasty salad. Make this for a fast and flavorful lunch you can pop in a picnic basket for a great summer meal.

Fall Harvest Salad

This salad has the best harvest flavors in every bite. With maple roasted squash, crispy apples, dried berries and a great dressing, this salad has a little something for everyone.

Cucumber apple salad in bowl.

Apple Cucumber Salad

Make an apple salad with refreshing cucumbers for a unique and delicious flavor that pairs well with so many main meals.

Classic Waldorf Salad

Waldorf salad is a potluck staple. This recipe turns out perfectly every time for a crowd pleasing side or dessert option.

Chopped apple salad.

Apple Melon Pineapple Salad

This fruity salad has all of the best flavors for a filling and refreshing healthy meal. This is great for a summer lunch to share with friends.

Spinach Apple Salad

Spinach and apples make for a delicious and easy combination for a healthy salad. You will love the crispy apples with walnuts and goat cheese.

Apple salad in bowl with berries.

Pomegranate and Brussels Sprouts Salad

This salad starts with brussels sprouts sliced thin, and adds crunchy nuts, juicy pomegranate and crisp apples to make a really good salad with plenty of honey mustard dressing!

Rainbow Broccoli Salad

Bring the colors of the rainbow to the table with this crunchy and delicious salad. It has plenty of apples, broccoli, nuts, carrots and grapes to offer a medley of tasty flavors for your next potluck or party.

Apple chicken walnut salad on lettuce leaves.

Apple Walnut Chicken Salad

Adding fruit and nuts is an easy way to make your chicken salad pop with great flavor. This will be a favorite fall lunch that is easy to meal prep ahead of time.

Walnut apple salad on plate.

Walnut Salad

Walnuts are the star of this salad, but it has plenty of apples, greens and onions to give it texture, crunch and so much flavor!

Simple Cabbage and Apple Salad

Simple is always a good idea on a busy night. This recipe uses cabbage and apples to make a great side for grilled meats, or sandwiches.

Green apple salad in bowl.

Apple Gorgonzola Salad

You can skip the trip to Buca di Beppo and get the iconic flavors of their apple gorgonzola salad at home with this easy to recreate dish.

Apple salad with avocado - Harvest salad.

Pomegranate and  Apple Harvest Salad

Pecans, apples, avocado and pomegranate make this salad burst with fresh flavor in every bite.

Cranberry Apple Salad

Cranberries and apples come together to make a fresh and flavorful salad that you can serve all fall long for the best healthy lunches.

Broccoli apple salad in bowl next to apples.

Broccoli Apple Salad 

Crispy apples, crunchy broccoli, and plenty of dressing come together in under 15 minutes to make a colorful and flavorful salad.

Arugula and apple salad.

Fall Panzanella Salad 

This fresh salad has ample fall flavors in an easy to assemble form. You will want to pack this and take it along on a picnic with someone special on a pretty fall day.

Apple salad in platter.

Fall Harvest Salad

Thinly sliced apples atop of leafy green lettuce with nuts, cheese and dressing make for a salad that captures the best flavors of the fall harvest in one easy to make salad.

Love our Recipe Collections?

If you love having themes for some of your favorite types of food, you’ll love these other recipe collections:

Ice Cream Sandwich Cake

This ice cream sandwich cake is different from others because of its special middle layer of smooth fudge and crunchy Oreos (similar to the Dairy Queen ice cream cake that we all love so much)! Note: Make sure to allow enough time for the cake to chill before serving! See more below. If you’re in a time crunch, you may prefer this peanut buster parfait!

If you saw my son’s Nautical Birthday party, then you probably noticed the ice cream bar that I incorporated. Ice cream is the perfect summer treat for a party or just as an easy dessert idea; not to mention an ice cream birthday party!

Post originally published in June 2015, and updated May 2023.

Slice of ice cream sandwich cake on white plate with cherries on top.

No-bake desserts are a popular treat during the summer so you’re not heating up the kitchen. This ice cream sandwich cake is one that can be made easily (with enough time in advance) that everyone seems to love. If you don’t want to work with ice cream though, this no-bake strawberry icebox cake is a great option!

If you’re craving Oreo ice cream desserts but don’t have enough time to make a cake, you’ll also love this cookies and cream milkshake which uses similar ingredients.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Similar to Dairy Queen’s Ice Cream Cake: If you love the popular ice cream cake, but don’t want to try to make that extensive cake, this recipe is similar, using ice cream sandwiches to make it so much easier!
  • Crunchy cookie layer: An ice cream sandwich cake is delicious anyway but when you add the buttery, crispy Oreo cookie crumbs layer in the fudge layer, it takes it to a whole new level.
  • Kid-friendly recipe: If you love the kids helping you in the kitchen, this is the perfect recipe to have them get involved with. They’ll be so excited to see the progress of the steps, and of course, eat the finished result.

🧾 Ingredients Needed

The ingredients for this recipe are basic, and you should be able to find them at your local grocery store.

Labeled ingredients on counter for ice cream sandwich cake.
  • Ice cream – I had never been a fan of ice cream until I had a “good” ice cream. I would usually buy the off-brands until I had Tillamook, and now I’m hooked. But any good brand of chocolate ice cream will do!
  • Corn Syrup – The corn syrup is used to give that ganache/chocolate layer a shine and to help the crushed Oreo cookies stick to one another.
  • Butter – the butter helps toast the cookie crumbs in the oven, so they don’t get soggy in the ice cream cake, so they maintain their crunch.

📖 Substitutions

If you find that you need to substitute any ingredients because you don’t have them, or need to for dietary reasons, here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Butter – you can use salted or unsalted
  • Vanilla extract – this isn’t mandatory and you can leave this out if needed but if you have it, I highly recommend adding it to the ganache.
  • Toppings – we love crushing more Oreos (in larger pieces) to sprinkle on top but feel free to use other toppings such as sprinkles, chocolate syrup (or more ganache), chocolate chips, etc.
  • Chocolate ice cream – if you prefer vanilla or a different flavor of ice cream, you can substitute this for chocolate.
  • Cool Whip – you can make your own whipped cream if you prefer that over Cool Whip.

👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make an Ice Cream Sandwich Cake

There is a process to making this ice cream cake but it’s an easy process!

This is broken into 3 components:

  • make Oreo crunchies
  • prepare ganache
  • build ice cream cake

I suggest making the cookie crumbs and the ganache first, so they both have time to cool before adding to the ice cream cake layers. Then, set any extra Oreos aside for the topping if you’d like, or to even save them to make Chocolate Sandwich Cookie Pancakes tomorrow morning!

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Before starting: Preheat your oven to 350° F. and remove chocolate ice cream and Cool Whip from the freezer so it begins to soften slightly to make spreading easier.

Steps 1-4 for making ice cream sandwich cake.

STEP 1. Crush Oreos and add to butter. Crush about 10 Oreos, to get about 1 cup of crushed crumbs. In a small bowl, mix with melted butter (Image 1).

STEP 2. Bake cookie crumbs. Spread buttery Oreo crumbs on a baking sheet that’s covered with parchment paper and bake at 350 degrees for 6-7 minutes (Image 2).

STEP 3. Make ganache. In a small, microwavable bowl, add chocolate chips, corn syrup, and vanilla (Image 3).

STEP 4. Heat heavy cream. Next, warm your heavy cream until just boiling, and then pour over the chocolate chips. Allow it to sit for 2-3 minutes and then whisk until smooth, chocolate ganache forms (Image 4).

Tip: Allow the ganache to sit and cool while making the first layer of ice cream sandwiches and chocolate ice cream. If your ganache hardens, you can microwave it for about 30 seconds to smooth it out again.

Steps 5-8 how to make ice cream sandwich cake.

STEP 5. First layer. In a loaf pan, add parchment paper to completely cover the pan. (You want to do this so when the entire cake is frozen, it’s easy to pull up out of the pan, to slice.) Make sure the entire loaf pan is covered with paper before filling. Add 5 ice cream sandwiches on top of parchment paper (Image 5).

NOTE: Depending on the size of your loaf pan, you may want to trim your sandwiches to fit in the pan better, or you can scrunch them down to fit (this is what I do).

STEP 6. Add chocolate ice cream layer. In a medium-sized mixing bowl, stir chocolate ice cream until it is smooth enough to spread on top of the ice cream sandwiches, and then freeze loaf pan of ice cream for 20 minutes (Image 6).

STEP 7. Add ganache. Remove the loaf pan from the freezer and pour on cooled ganache on top of the chocolate ice cream, and then freeze for about 10 minutes. (Image 7).

STEP 8. Add crunchies. Sprinkle on the crushed, baked Oreo cookie crumbs on top of the fudgy layer and then freeze for 2 hours (Image 8).

Steps 9-11 for how to make ice cream cake.

STEP 9. Add 2nd ice cream sandwich layer. Next, add 5 more ice cream sandwiches on top of the crunchy cookie layer (Image 9).

STEP 10. Top with Cool Whip. Spread Cool Whip layer on top of the ice cream sandwiches (Image 10).

STEP 11. Garnish with Oreos. If desired, crush (in to small pieces) about 4-5 Oreo cookies and sprinkle on top of ice cream sandwich cake. Cover with plastic wrap and freeze for 3-4 hours (or overnight to be safe) until cake is fully frozen and thick enough to slice (Image 11).

Layered ice cream sandwiches with ice cream for an ice cream cake.

STEP 12. Slice and serve. Remove the cake from the loaf pan by grabbing parchment paper and lifting it out. Peel the parchment paper from the sides of the cake and slice.

Ice cream sandwich cake on white platter.

💭 Recipe Pro Tips

  • Warm knife. When the ice cream cake is so frozen, it helps to warm your knife under hot water before slicing. This makes slicing a lot easier.
  • Slice only at serving. Slice as needed, rather than slicing the entire cake at once. This will help keep the cake from thawing out too quickly and makes storing leftover cake easier.
Sliced ice cream cake sandwich on white plate with fork.

📋 Recipe FAQs

How do you store leftover ice cream cake?

Do not slice the cake until serving. This makes it easier to store. You can place the ice cream cake back in the parchment paper and back in to the loaf pan if desired. Or, you can wrap the cake in plastic wrap and place in the freezer. (Make sure it’s fully wrapped so if it does thaw a bit, it will not leak.)

Can you use chocolate ice cream sandwiches or different flavors of ice cream for ice cream cake?

Yes absolutely. Feel free to use your favorite flavors to mix things up in this recipe.

Bite of ice cream cake sandwich on fork.

🍰 More Summer Recipes You’ll Love

If you love no bake desserts like this one for the summer months, you’ll also love these reader favorites:

Recipe

Ice cream sandwich cake on white plate, with cherries on top.
Print Pin
5 from 1 vote

Ice Cream Sandwich Cake

A no bake summer dessert recipe that uses ice cream sandwiches, chocolate ice cream, and has an incredibly layer of fudge and chocolate cookie crumbs!
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 30 minutes
Freeze Time 6 hours
Total Time 6 hours 30 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 899kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Equipment

  • loaf pan
  • parchment paper
  • mixing bowls

Ingredients

  • 10 ice cream sandwiches
  • 24 ounces chocolate ice cream

Oreo Crunchy Layer

  • 10 Oreo cookies
  • 2 Tablespoons melted butter

Chocolate Ganache Layer

  • 3 Tablespoons corn syrup
  • 1 cup milk chocolate chips
  • ½ teaspoons vanilla extract
  • ½ cup heavy cream

Topping

  • 8 ounces Cool Whip
  • 5 Oreo cookies
  • cherries if desired

Instructions

Prep:

  • Before starting: Preheat your oven to 350° F. and remove chocolate ice cream and Cool Whip from the freezer so it begins to soften slightly to make spreading easier.

Crunchy Cookie Layer:

  • Crush Oreos and add to butter. Crush about 10 Oreos, to get about 1 cup of crushed crumbs. In a small bowl, mix with melted butter.
  • Bake cookie crumbs. Spread buttery Oreo crumbs on a baking sheet that's covered with parchment paper and bake at 350 degrees for 6-7 minutes.

Make Ganache:

  • Make ganache. In a small, microwavable bowl, add chocolate chips, corn syrup, and vanilla.
  • Heat heavy cream. Next, warm your heavy cream until just boiling, and then pour over the chocolate chips. Allow it to sit for 2-3 minutes and then whisk until smooth, chocolate ganache forms.

Build Ice Cream Cake:

  • First layer. In a loaf pan, add parchment paper to completely cover the pan. (You want to do this so when the entire cake is frozen, it's easy to pull up out of the pan, to slice.) Make sure the entire loaf pan is covered with paper before filling. Add 5 ice cream sandwiches on top of parchment paper.
  • Add chocolate ice cream layer. In a medium-sized mixing bowl, stir chocolate ice cream until it is smooth enough to spread on top of the ice cream sandwiches, and then freeze loaf pan of ice cream for 20 minutes.
  • Add ganache. Remove the loaf pan from the freezer and pour on cooled ganache on top of the chocolate ice cream, and then freeze for about 10 minutes.
  • Add crunchies. Sprinkle on the crushed, baked Oreo cookie crumbs on top of the fudgy layer and then freeze for 2 hours.
  • Add 2nd ice cream sandwich layer. Next, add 5 more ice cream sandwiches on top of the crunchy cookie layer.
  • Top with Cool Whip. Spread Cool Whip layer on top of the ice cream sandwiches.
  • Garnish with Oreos. If desired, crush (in to small pieces) about 4-5 Oreo cookies and sprinkle on top of ice cream sandwich cake. Cover with plastic wrap and freeze for 3-4 hours (or overnight to be safe) until cake is fully frozen and thick enough to slice.
  • Slice and serve. Remove the cake from the loaf pan by grabbing parchment paper and lifting it out. Peel the parchment paper from the sides of the cake and slice.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving (⅛ cake) | Calories: 899kcal | Carbohydrates: 135g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 18g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 48mg | Sodium: 547mg | Potassium: 525mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 84g | Vitamin A: 577IU | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 180mg | Iron: 4mg

Air Fryer Apple Fritters

Air Fryer Apple Fritters: If you like apples, you’ll LOVE this sweet treat. This easy dessert or breakfast treat, uses fresh apples and can be on the table in under 30 minutes!

This is by far one of our favorite air fryer recipes we have on the blog, along with our air fryer cinnamon rolls. This also ranks right up there with our apple pie nachos.

Originally published in November 2021 and recipe was re-tested and updated in May 2023.

Air fryer apple fritters on cooling rack.

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

Although pumpkins steal a lot of the spotlight in the fall, this time of year is also apple season!

With an abundance of fresh apples around, now is the perfect time to test out these great apple fritters. This easy recipe uses simple ingredients you most likely have on hand and comes together in under 30 minutes!

They’re delicious as a breakfast idea or even as a fun snack recipe to use up any extra apples!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

These easy air fryer apple fritters use simple ingredients you probably have in your house already.

Labeled ingredients for air fryer apple fritters.

Substitutions

  • You can substitute the brown sugar for extra white sugar of the same measurements.
  • Feel free to leave the nutmeg out of the recipe if desired. 
  • Substituting the whole milk with heavy cream for a thicker texture is an option.
  • You can substitute the gala apples with any flavor or sweet apple you’d like.

Instructions

Steps 1-4 for air fryer apple fritters.
  1. Whisk together the flour, baking soda, sugars, salt, cinnamon, and nutmeg in a medium-sized mixing bowl. Set aside. 
  2. In a separate bowl, whisk together the whole milk, lemon juice, and eggs until smooth. 
  3. Fold the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients (careful not to overmix unless you want tough, dense fritters). 
  4. Fold the apples into the batter. 
Apples and fritter batter in glass mixing bowl.

Pro Tip: Make sure you line the basket with parchment paper or an air fryer liner. Most air fryer baskets have holes in them. If you do not line the basket, the batter will seep through the holes and make a mess. 

Steps 5-8 on how to make air fryer apple fritters.
  1. Line the basket of an air fryer with parchment paper and scoop dollops of the fritter batter onto the parchment paper using a ¼ cup measure. 
  2. Air fry the apple fritters at 400 degrees F for 7 minutes. Flip the fritters and fry for an additional 4 minutes. 
  3. While the fritters are frying, whisk together the powdered sugar, vanilla, whole milk, and cinnamon. (If you prefer a thicker glaze, you can add more powdered sugar.)
  4. As soon as the fritters come out of the air fryer, spoon the glaze over them. 
  5. Serve warm or at room temperature.
Spoon pouring glaze over the top of apple fritters.

Storage

Leftovers: To store these air fryer apple fritters, allow these air fryer fritters to cool to room temperature before sealing them in an airtight container. Keep them at room temperature for up to 2 days or in the refrigerator for up to 1 week.

Freezing: You can make these air fryer fritters ahead of time and freeze them. Allow the fritters to cool to room temperature before sealing them in an airtight container and storing them in the freezer. You can keep them there for up to 3 months.

To Thaw: If you choose to freeze these air fryer apple fritters, allow them to thaw on the countertop or in your refrigerator before serving.

Reheat: If you want to enjoy your apple fritters warm, place them in the microwave in 10-second intervals until they reach the desired temperature. You can also arrange them on a parchment paper-lined baking sheet and bake in the oven at 325 degrees F for 10 minutes or until heated through. 

Bite taken out of air fryer apple fritters, that are stacked on top of one another.

Expert Tips and FAQs

Why are my apple fritters soggy?

The most likely answer to this question is that you have made your dough scoops too large. If you make your dough scoops larger than the ¼ cup recommended in the recipe, you will risk having a soggy center or a soggy bottom on your apple fritter.

(Don’t make them too small though- if you don’t add enough batter, you will risk burning the tops of your apple fritters!)

How do you reheat apple fritters in the air fryer?

The best way to reheat your apple fritters is in the oven or air fryer. Preheat your air fryer to 400°, heat your apple fritters for 2 minutes, and voila!

Expert Tip: Never microwave an air fryer apple fritter to warm it up. It will turn out soggy and chewy every time. It’s well worth it to take the extra few minutes and warm them up in the air fryer!

Why are my apple fritters doughy in the middle?

This could be a common case of dropping too much batter into the air fryer. ¼ cup of batter is the perfect amount to get a nice golden-brown crisp on the top of the fritter, and a soft chewy center.

Do I have to use peeled apples or can I leave them whole?

I prefer peeling the apples for this recipe but you do not have to. It really is a matter of personal preference. Some people enjoy the texture of the skins. Others do not.

How do I make the glaze for apple fritters thicker?

Make sure to use whole milk when making the glaze! You can also add more powdered sugar in tablespoon increments until the glaze thickens if preferred.

Glazed air fryer apple fritters next to cinnamon sticks.

Love apple fritters as much as we do? Then you’ll also want to check out these old fashioned apple fritters too!

If you love apples, then you’ll also love this Snicker apple salad and this caramel apple dump cake!

Recipe

Air fryer apple fritters on cooling rack.
Print Pin
4.93 from 26 votes

Air Fryer Apple Fritters

If you like apples, you'll LOVE this easy sweet treat for breakfast or for a warm and comforting snack or dessert.
Course Breakfast, Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 11 minutes
Total Time 26 minutes
Servings 8 fritters
Calories 179kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Equipment

  • air fryer

Ingredients

Fritter

  • 1 ½ cups all-purpose white flour
  • 3 Tablespoons white granulated sugar
  • 2 teaspoons baking soda
  • 1 Tablespoon brown sugar
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • 2 teaspoons ground cinnamon
  • 1 teaspoons ground nutmeg
  • ½ cup whole milk
  • 1½ Tablespoons lemon juice
  • 2 large eggs cold
  • 2 gala apples diced

Glaze

  • ½ cup powdered sugar
  • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
  • ¼ cup whole milk
  • ½ teaspoon cinnamon

Instructions

  • Combine the dry ingredients. Whisk together the flour, baking soda, sugars, salt, cinnamon, and nutmeg in a medium-sized mixing bowl. Set aside. 
  • Combine the wet ingredients. In a separate bowl, whisk together the whole milk, lemon juice, and eggs until smooth.
  • Mix together. Fold the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients (careful not to overmix unless you want tough, dense fritters). 
  • Add apples. Fold the apples into the batter. 
  • Prep. Line the basket of an air fryer with parchment paper and scoop dollops of the fritter batter onto the parchment paper using a ¼ cup measure. 
  • Air Fry. Air fry the apple fritters at 400 degrees F for 7 minutes. Flip the fritters and fry for an additional 4 minutes. 
  • Make Glaze. While the fritters are frying, whisk together the powdered sugar, vanilla, whole milk, and cinnamon. 
  • Glaze Fritters. As soon as the fritters come out of the air fryer, spoon the glaze over them. 
  • Serve warm or at room temperature.

Notes

HINT: When picking an apple to use for your air fryer apple fritters, you want to make sure you choose a nice, crunchy apple. Gala apples work perfectly for apple fritters; however, you can also use honey crisp apples, granny smith apples, etc.
Glaze: Make sure to use whole milk when making the glaze! You can also add more powdered sugar in tablespoon increments until the glaze thickens if preferred.
Storage: Cool to room temperature before sealing them in an airtight container. Keep them at room temperature for up to 2 days or in the refrigerator for up to 1 week.
Reheat: Place in the microwave in 10-second intervals until they reach the desired temperature. You can also arrange them on a parchment paper-lined baking sheet and bake in the oven at 325 degrees F for 10 minutes or until heated through. 

Nutrition

Serving: 1fritter | Calories: 179kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.004g | Cholesterol: 44mg | Sodium: 155mg | Potassium: 166mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 117IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 64mg | Iron: 1mg

Smoked Burger Recipe

This smoked burger recipe only takes one hour on the smoker and is an easy recipe, creating the best, juiciest, smoked burgers, or cheeseburgers.

Burger recipes are one of our favorite easy dinners here because they can be customized with your favorite burger toppings, and can be made in so many different ways. You can cook burgers on the stove, air fry burgers, cook burgers in an electric skillet, and even grill burgers from frozen. Now, this burger recipe on the smoker may be your go-to during the summer months.

Originally published December 2020, updated May 2023.

Smoked burger on white plate, topped with pickles, tomato, and cheese.

Whether you just love using your smoker or absolutely adore that smoky flavor, smoking hamburgers is a great way to cook those beef patties! I’ve even smoked a large beef patty for smoked cheeseburger sliders.

I’ll be honest… I DESPISED making hamburgers for the longest time. They were dry, lacked flavor, and made a huge mess in the kitchen…until I started making hamburgers in the oven. That was the day my life was changed and since then, it has changed the lives of so many other hamburger lovers out there too!

Here’s what one Fantabulosity reader said recently,

“Made burgers this way the last 2 nights. I will be making burgers this way from now on! They came out great!”

– Cammy

Why You’ll Want to Make These

Once I had my oven-baked hamburger skill down, and my husband had his elk burger recipe down, I knew it was time to branch out and try my hand at smoking burgers on the pellet grill too, since we’ve been really having fun creating smoked meats and recipes lately!

And let me tell ya… talk about a burger with a flavor punch. That natural “smoke” flavor from the wood chips, combined with an easy salt & pepper seasoning, creates a delicious taste to go along with the crispy edges and great char flavor.

Can You Smoke Burgers?

I wondered the same thing. Short answer… yes. Long answer, keep reading:

We’ve been on a kick lately using our smoker so when my meal planner had “cheeseburgers” on it the other day, I wanted to shake things up a bit and throw these bad boys on the smoker for the first time to see how they did.

We had friends coming over so I was a little nervous but when they bit in to them and said they were juicy, flavorful, and “really good”… I knew we were on to something.

So I made them again the next day and had one and I have to say I was pleasantly surprised too. Now, they’re on our weekly meal plan rotation!

Considering we have been smoking a LOT of different meats at 225°, I wanted to keep this recipe the same because the results of low and slow have been phenomenal… and this one is no different.

How long does it take to smoke burgers at 225°

We found that smoking the burgers (we did about 3-4 burgers per pound if that helps you determine thickness) for 1 hour was the perfect time. Now, the time can vary depending on how DONE you want your burger but for us, this was “done” and no longer had blood running through it.

However, if you don’t have a lot of experience with smoking foods, keep in mind that the middle may still resemble a pink color even if it’s fully cooked.

“What should the internal temperature of a hamburger be?”

If you want to get technical, you can take the internal temperature of your burgers and stop the cooking process when you’re comfortable with the temp. The USDA recommends the internal temp of a hamburger reach 160°.

What Kind of Pellets to Use for Smoked Burgers

We love experimenting with different pellets (or chips) for our smoker but we’ve found that hickory is always a winner for burgers. But feel free to switch things up!

Do you flip burgers when smoking?

No. But feel free to do so if you’re used to doing so. The pellet grill we use cooks pretty evenly so there hasn’t been a need to flip them for us, which makes things easier because there’s no need to babysit them for the one-hour cook time.

How to Smoke Burgers

Patty out burgers to desired thickness. For 1 lb. of ground beef I usually make 3 thick burgers but sometimes stretch it to 4.

Steps 1-4 to make smoked burgers.

If you need to make more for your entire family or for friends, feel free to double the recipe as needed!

Also keep in mind that the thickness of burgers can make the cook time vary, especially if you want to stay away from a rare burger so extra time may be necessary if really thick patties are more your style

For the photos that you see, I used 2 lbs. of ground beef and it made 7 burgers. If you have more ground beef, you’ll love these other ground beef dinner ideas.

How to Season Hamburgers

Salt and black pepper. Sure, I’ve tried all of my favorite ingredients… Montreal Steak Seasoning, garlic powder, Worcestershire sauce, onion powder… you name it. But I’m telling ya… there is something about just using salt and pepper, allowing the flavor of the meat (and smoke flavor in this case) to really shine through for the best results.

However, feel free to use your favorite seasoned patties recipe or combo of spices too!

I just sprinkle a little bit of salt (kosher is our favorite) and cracked peppercorn medley on the top of each patty. Use these as desired. I typically free hand it… but if you’re looking for some guidance I’d say it’s safe to say at least a teaspoon of KOSHER (maybe less for regular table salt), and a ½ teaspoon of cracked peppercorn medley (or ground black pepper).

Place burgers on the preheated smoker at 225° for one hour, or until your desired “doneness”, preferably until the internal temperature reaches at least 160 degrees. No flipping needed!

Smoked Cheeseburgers

If you want to make cheeseburgers, simply lay a cheese slice (American, pepper jack cheddar cheese, or your favorite kind) on the burgers after the cook-time and let it rest (with the smoker turned off and the lid closed) for a few more minutes, for the perfect melted cheese.

Remove from the smoker and they’re ready for your favorite condiments if desired!

Now, if you love cheese on a burger, these juicy lucy burgers are going to blow your mind!

Tips for Juicy Burgers – Dimple in the Middle to Trap Juices

A little trick I learned from the Pioneer Woman a long time ago was to press a little dimple in to the middle of a burger patty when you’re forming them in to hamburger patties. This helps traps the juices so they don’t run out and go to waste.

You can see in the photo below that this one did the job!

Cooked smoked burgers on parchment paper, showing how the juices are trapped.

Burger Toppings

For this recipe, I kept the toppings pretty simple and just used what we had on hand: Cheese, tomato and pickles.

But if you want to get in to a heck of a lot of fun and top the burgers, here are some of our other favorite topping ideas:

  • Barbecue Sauce
  • Mustard
  • Ketchup
  • Hot Sauce
  • Steak Sauce
  • Slice of Bacon
  • Onion
  • Onion Rings (Like in this bbq burger!)

Make sure you check out an extensive list of topping ideas that I shared in “Burger Bar Ideas” post.

Smoked burger on white plate, next to french fries.

What to Serve with Smoked Burgers

If you’re smoking burgers, and looking for side dishes to throw on the smoker too, you’ll LOVE these smoked stuffed mushrooms!

Or if you’re having a cookout, our favorite side dishes for hosting and smoking meat on the grill are:

More Hamburger Recipes You’ll Love:

If you love hamburgers as much as we do, you’ll also love these burger recipes:

More Smoker Recipes You’ll Love:

If you’re like us, if we have the smoker hot and ready, we like to throw other items on it to help meal plan for the week, like our Smoked Chicken Tenderloins and our Smoked Cornish Game Hens!

Traeger brisket is an amazing thing to make on a holiday weekend or just for fun!

Or, if you have a beef roast on hand, you’ll love making this pulled beef!

Smoked Luther Burger

Ready to uplevel your smoked burger game? Top it with smoked candied bacon and use glazed donuts as buns to make Luther burgers!

Did You Make This?
Snap a pic and hashtag it #Fantabulosity — I love to see your creations on Instagram and Facebook.

Recipe

Smoked burger on a white plate, topped with pickles, cheese and tomato.
Print Pin
5 from 6 votes

Smoked Burgers

Smoked Burgers: How & how long to cook burgers on the smoker, creating a JUICY, flavorful burger with salt & pepper and natural smoke flavor!
Course Main Course
Cuisine American
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 5 minutes
Servings 4 burgers
Calories 288kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Equipment

  • smoker

Ingredients

  • 1 pound ground beef
  • salt as desired – see blog post for tips
  • pepper as desired – see blog post for tips
  • sliced cheese if desired

Instructions

  • Preheat smoker to 225°
  • Patty out burgers – with one pound, sometimes I make 3 thicker burgers and sometimes I make 4 thinner. Either way, the cook time will be the same.
  • Salt and pepper the tops of your burgers. You can salt/pepper as desired. See blog post for tips on what type of salt/pepper and how much depending on type.
  • Place the burgers on the smoker racks (directly, no pan needed) and cook for one hour or until the desired doneness. (USDA recommends the internal temperature of burgers should be 160°.) NOTE: No need to flip the burgers.

Notes

Tip for the Juciest Burgers – A little trick I learned from the Pioneer Woman a long time ago was to press a little dimple in to the middle of a burger patty when you’re forming them in to hamburger patties. This helps traps the juices so they don’t run out and go to waste.
What kind of pellets to use for the smoker?
We love experimenting with different pellets (or chips) for our smoker but we’ve found that hickory is always a winner for burgers. But feel free to switch things up!

Nutrition

Serving: 1burger | Calories: 288kcal | Protein: 19g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 81mg | Sodium: 76mg | Potassium: 306mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 2mg

Lemon Puppy Chow

Lemon Puppy Chow: If you love the classic muddy buddies recipe and lemon, then you’re going to love this easy recipe too! Using white chocolate instead of milk chocolate, add lemon juice and zest, and a few other ingredients and this easy snack recipe is ready in just 20 minutes!

Lemon puppy chow in white bowl, sitting next to lemons.

We absolutely love the classic puppy chow recipe but we also have so much fun coming up with different versions like this one. This hot chocolate muddy buddies recipe is perfect in the winter, while the lemon muddy buddies are perfect in the summer.

Using cereal to make no-bake desserts is very common, and we love using different kinds for different recipes. These Fruity Pebbles Rice Krispie Treats are a fruity version of the classic rice krispy treat, and these Lucky Charms Treats are such a fun twist too.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Refreshing: With the lemon flavor, it’s so refreshing for the warmer months. It’s still a sweet treat but not too heavy and has the perfect amount of lemon flavor.
  • Easy recipe: Zesting your lemon may be the most work that you have to put in to this recipe, and even that is easy!
  • Ready in only 20 minutes: In just a few minutes, you can have a snack, ready to conquer that sweet tooth!

Ingredients Needed

Nothing fancy is needed for this recipe! These simple ingredients can be found at most grocery stores. But if you stock up on lemons, make this classic lemon meringue pie for dessert, too!

Labeled ingredients for lemon puppy chow.
  • Butter – We use unsalted for this recipe but honestly, you can use salted if that’s what you have on hand.
  • Cereal – We usually use rice square cereal (such as Rice Chex) but we’ve also used Corn Chex and those taste amazing as well.
  • White Chocolate Chips – There are many different brands of white chocolate chips but we prefer using Guittard or Ghirardelli because they’re a great quality of chocolate when melted and for taste.

Note: You may not need all 4 lemons. (It can depend on the size of your lemons and if you’ll be using the lemon juices from the same lemons you’ll be zesting.) You can zest first, and then slice the lemons to get the 2 Tablespoons of juice. If you have lemons left over, this lemon blondies recipe is another one to try.

Substitutions

  • Lemons – if you don’t have enough lemons to get the lemon juice from, you can use store-bought lemon juice. But remember, you’ll still want the lemon zest and even though it doesn’t sound like it’s enough to matter, it’s important.

How to Make Lemon Puppy Chow

Grab a couple of bowls, one medium-sized, and one large bowl. You’ll be melting the chocolate, butter, and lemon together in the medium bowl and pouring it over the cereal that will be in the biggest bowl. So make sure to use a large bowl that will hold and allow room to stir 9 cups of cereal.

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Recipe Prep – Important!

First, you’ll want to zest at least 4 Tablespoons of lemon zest and make at least 2 Tablespoons of lemon juice from your lemons.

Next, pour cereal in to large bowl, so when the chocolate has melted, you can quickly pour over the cereal before it hardens.

Steps 1-4 lemon puppy chow.

STEP 1. Lemon coating. Pour white chocolate chips, lemon juice, zest, and butter in a medium-sized, microwavable bowl.

STEP 2. Melt chocolate. In 30-second intervals, melt the chocolate in the microwave, stirring well after each time, until melted. (This was a total of 3 times for us.)

STEP 3. Pour over cereal. Next, pour melted chocolate over cereal and gently stir until combined.

STEP 4. Add half the powdered sugar. Next, pour half of the sugar on top of the melted chocolate-covered cereal and stir again, gently.

Tip: When stirring, stir slowly and be careful not to mash the cereal so it breaks. You want to try and keep the pieces whole for easy snacking.

You can also add the chocolate-covered cereal to a brown paper bag or ziptop bag, and then shake to coat with powdered sugar if you prefer.

STEP 5. Add remaining sugar. Then, pour the remaining powdered sugar on top of the cereal and stir until coated again. Serve!

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Spread and Cool. You can pour the lemon puppy chow on a baking sheet after coating for it to fully cool before serving, if desired.
  • Extra Powdered Sugar. Feel free to sprinkle extra powdered sugar on top just before serving if the chocolate has consumed a lot of the sugar and you prefer a dusting.
  • Crunchy/Chewy Texture. The combination of the lemon juice and the white chocolate can create a chewy texture to this snack recipe, yet there’s still crunch in some areas too! It’s the perfect texture combo! If yours has this texture, you’ve made the recipe correctly!
Lemon puppy chow in white bowl, sitting next lemons.

Serving Suggestions

  • Laid-back snacking: This recipe is great for snacking on the weekends or for a movie night.
  • Party snack: Serving this at a party is a crowd-pleaser and everyone loves the lemon twist to a classic favorite.
  • Serve on top: Take things to a whole other level and add on top of a bowl of ice cream for a crunch snack with a creamy soft serve.

Storage

  • Store any leftovers in an airtight container or it can get stale.
  • You can also freeze any leftovers if needed. Place in a freezer-safe container and freeze for up to 3 months.

More Lemon Recipes You’ll Love

If you have lemons and are looking for other recipes to use them in, these are our most popular lemon recipes that you’ll love:

Recipe

Lemon Puppy Chow in white bowl.
Print Pin
5 from 3 votes

Lemon Puppy Chow

This recipe is a delicious twist on classic Muddy Buddies. The lemon flavors shine through so wonderfully and this recipe is refreshing on a hot day!
Course Snack
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 9 cups
Calories 518kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 9 cups rice square cereal or corn square cereal (such as Chex)
  • 12 ounces white chocolate chips
  • ¼ cup or 4 Tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 4 Tablespoons lemon zest
  • 2 Tablespoons fresh lemon juice
  • 1 cup powdered sugar plus extra for garnish

Instructions

  • Prep cereal: Pour cereal into a large mixing bowl.
  • Make lemon chocolate: In a separate microwaveable bowl, add white chocolate chips, butter, lemon zest, and juice. Microwave in 30-second intervals, until the chips are melted and you are able to mix completely.
  • Cover cereal: Pour the melted mixture, over the top of the cereal, and gently stir to coat.
  • Mix: Once evenly mixed, pour cereal mixture in to a large, resealable bag. (You can also stir in bowl if you don't have a bag but only be gentle so you don't break the pieces.)
  • Sugar: Pour about ½ cup powdered sugar on top of cereal, seal bag & shake.
  • More sugar: Once coated, open bag, and pour remaining powdered sugar over cereal.
  • Coat: Seal bag & shake again, or if stirring in bowl, stir until evenly covered. You can sprinkle on more powdered sugar if desired, as a garnish. Enjoy!

Notes

Note: When mixing lemon juice and chocolate, and covering the crunchy cereal, it can make the puppy chow have a chewier texture than a full-on crunch. This is one of our favorite parts!
Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container and keep at room temperature.

Nutrition

Serving: 1cup | Calories: 518kcal | Carbohydrates: 87g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 22mg | Sodium: 388mg | Potassium: 344mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 42g | Vitamin A: 836IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 210mg | Iron: 19mg

Banana Pudding Brownies

Banana Pudding Brownies: A combination of simple ingredients, that combines the flavors of brownies with an old-fashioned dessert, makes this an easy dessert recipe and brownie recipe to remember!

Banana Pudding Brownie on spatula

Why You’ll Love These Banana Pudding Brownies

If you love old-fashioned desserts like banana cream pie or just the classic banana pudding flavor in almost anything, then you will absolutely love these! Some may even say they should be called banana pudding blondies but we like to call them whatever rolls off the tongue! So feel free to call them what you like!

We’ve had so much fun experimenting with bananas around here lately, especially with this banana bread pudding, this banana pudding dip, and these peanut butter banana brownies, and not to mention the best banana bread that has been shared thousands of times on Facebook!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

You know the best thing about this recipe? It uses only a few, simple ingredients and you probably even have most of them on hand already! We love easy around here, as you can tell from some of our other brownie recipes that are made with cake mixes like these red velvet brownies.

ingredients on table for banana pudding brownies
Ingredients

For the Brownies:

  • 2 ¼ cup packed light brown sugar
  • 11 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted
  • 3 eggs
  • 2 ⅔ cups all purpose flour
  • 2 ½ teaspoons baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon salt

For the Filling:

  • 8 ounces softened cream cheese
  • 3.4-ounce box banana instant pudding mix (or you can use instant vanilla pudding mix and extract in a banana flavor)
  • 2 eggs
  • ⅓ cup whole or 2% milk
  • Vanilla wafers for topping (15 or so, or more if you prefer!)

Substitutions

To keep things easy, you can use a banana pudding mix for this recipe but if you have trouble finding it, you can also use vanilla pudding mix, and use 2 tablespoons of banana extract or flavoring! Mix the flavoring in with the pudding mix.

Variations

  • Although I know you’ll love these delicious banana pudding brownies, have fun experimenting and try different flavors of pudding mixes, to come up with new brownie recipes!
  • Also feel free to slice bananas and put those on top – but do know that they can turn brown quickly so you may want to be cautious of that.
  • For fudgy brownies, more like traditional brownies, you may want to consider adding a little cocoa powder as well, to the brownie mix. Please note that I have not tried this yet so I’m not sure how much to advise you on trying, so you may want to experiment!
  • Love Cool Whip? Try a dollop of whipped cream on top of the brownie when serving for some added goodness!
  • Get wild and crumble up some of your favorite cookies, like Oreo Cookies or even ice cream toppings for more pizzazz!

How to Make Banana Pudding Brownies

  1. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees and spray a 9×13 baking dish with cooking spray. (Or if you prefer using parchment paper to bake, that’s ok too!) Set aside.
Steps 1-4 for banana pudding brownies.
  1. In a large mixing bowl, stir together the brown sugar and melted butter. Add the eggs one at a time and mix well. (You can use a hand mixer or an electric mixer but a spoon should work just as well.)
  2. In a separate bowl, combine the flour, baking powder, and salt.
  3. Then add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients. Mix together until a dough forms.
  4. Place the dough into the baking dish and spread it evenly to all corners. Set the baking dish in the oven and bake for 25 minutes.
Steps 5-8 of banana pudding brownies.
  1. Meanwhile, blend together the cream cheese and the pudding mix. Then slowly add the eggs and milk. You’ll want to blend it for 3-5 minutes to get it nice and thick. 
  2. After 25 minutes, remove the brownies and pour the pudding mixture on top of the brownie, spreading it in to an even layer.
  3. Add Vanilla Wafers on top of the pudding layer. (We used about 15 but feel free to use more!)
  4. Place the baking dish back into the oven and bake for another 25 to 30 minutes.
  5. Remove the baking dish from the oven and let the brownies completely cool before serving.

Top Tip

The brownies may be a bit soft in the middle when they first come out. After the brownies have cooled, they should “firm up” a bit, so make sure the brownies are completely cooled before serving. You can place the pan on a wire rack to help cool things off faster, as well!

I have a feeling this ultimate banana pudding brownie recipe, may just become a new delicious dessert recipe to take to any get-together or to enjoy when a sweet tooth strikes, even as much as this banana pudding poke cake recipe.

Slice of banana pudding brownie on white plate

Storage

Have leftover brownies? Rather than room temperature, we prefer placing them in the refrigerator, in an airtight container, or cover with plastic wrap, so they’ll last longer. (But they don’t really last long around our house anyway.)

You can eat them cold or you can warm them slightly in the microwave the next time you’re ready to enjoy them! Best to be enjoyed within 4-5 days.

More Dessert Recipes

If you loved this recipe, then you’re also going to love all of our other brownie recipes, especially these chocolate peanut butter brownies and these brownies with frosting! Or, these popular dessert recipes are going to be some of your favorites too:

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

banana pudding brownie on white plate
Print Pin
5 from 38 votes

Banana Pudding Brownies

Banana Pudding Brownies: A combination of simple ingredients, that combines the flavors of brownies with an old-fashioned dessert, makes this an easy dessert recipe to remember!
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 15 brownies
Calories 395kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Equipment

Ingredients

Brownies

  • 2 ½ cups packed light brown sugar
  • 11 tablespoons unsalted butter melted
  • 3 eggs
  • 2 ⅔ cups all purpose flour
  • 2 ½ teaspoons baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon salt

Topping

  • 8 ounces softened cream cheese
  • 3.4 ounce boxed instant banana pudding mix or you can use instant vanilla pudding mix and 2 Tablespoons of banana extract flavoring
  • 2 eggs
  • ⅓ cup milk whole or 2%
  • Vanilla Wafers for topping (about 15 or more if you like!)

Instructions

To make the brownies:

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees and spray a 9×13 baking dish with cooking spray. Set aside.
  • In a large bowl, stir together the brown sugar and melted butter. Add the eggs one at a time and mix well. 
    2 ½ cups packed light brown sugar, 11 tablespoons unsalted butter, 3 eggs
  • In a separate bowl, combine the flour, baking powder, and salt.
    2 ⅔ cups all purpose flour, 2 ½ teaspoons baking powder, ½ teaspoon salt
  • Then add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients. Mix together until a dough forms.
  • Place the dough into the baking dish and spread it evenly to all corners.
  • Set the baking dish in the oven and bake for 25 minutes.

How to Make Banana Topping

  • Meanwhile, with a mixer, mix together the cream cheese and the pudding mix. Then slowly add the eggs and milk. You’ll want to blend it for 3-5 minutes to get it nice and thick. 
    8 ounces softened cream cheese, 3.4 ounce boxed instant banana pudding mix, 2 eggs, ⅓ cup milk
  • After baking the brownies for 25 minutes, remove the brownies and pour the pudding mixture on top, spreading to an even layer and then add the Vanilla Wafers on top.
    Vanilla Wafers
  • Place the baking dish back into the oven and bake for another 25 to 30 minutes.
  • Remove the baking dish from the oven and let the brownies completely cool before serving.
  • NOTE: The brownies may be a bit soft in the middle when they first come out. After the brownies have cooled, they should “firm up” a bit, so make sure the brownies are completely cooled before serving. 

Notes

Storage:
Have leftover brownies? We prefer placing them in the refrigerator so they’ll last longer. (But they don’t really last long around our house anyway.) You can eat them cold or you can warm them slightly in the microwave the next time you’re ready to enjoy them! Best to be enjoyed within 4-5 days.

Nutrition

Serving: 1brownie | Calories: 395kcal | Carbohydrates: 60g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 93mg | Sodium: 257mg | Potassium: 192mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 41g | Vitamin A: 548IU | Calcium: 95mg | Iron: 2mg

American Flag Fruit Pizza

This American Flag Fruit Pizza is an eye-catching red, white, and blue dessert recipe, that features a soft sugar cookie dough base, a luscious frosting layer, and vibrant blueberries and raspberries artfully arranged to resemble the American flag for the Fourth of July!

If you’re making desserts for the 4th of July, you’re also going to love our 4th of July cupcakes and our mini trifle cups that use a lot of the same ingredients as this flag pizza!

American flag fruit pizza on marble counter with red, white and blue stars surrounding it.

Not only is this fruit pizza visually stunning, but it’s also bursting with bright, fruity flavors that will delight your guests. Read on to discover how easy it is to create this fantastic recipe that’s sure to become the star of your festive spread for occasions such as Memorial Day or to celebrate Independence Day on July 4th.

If you love the idea of fruit pizza and want to try another sweet pizza idea, check out this Oreo Pizza Recipe for a chocolate lovers version. Or you could go for a simple fruit salad to keep up the healthy theme with this Honey Lime Fruit Salad recipe.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It uses a few ingredients: With only 5 ingredients, this recipe doesn’t need anything too complicated to make.
  • Colorful and fun: The recipe looks as amazing as it tastes and is great for holidays such as serving a 4th of July fruit pizza on a themed party table.
  • Ready in only 60 minutes: With just 15 minutes cooking and the same for prep then 30 minutes to cool, the recipe is ready in only an hour.

🧾 Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Ingredients for American flag fruit pizza, labeled on white marble.
  • Dough – We used a 16.5 ounce roll of refrigerated sugar cookie dough for this recipe as it is easy to use and very tasty.
  • Frosting – The best frosting for the recipe that we found was a simple store-bought white tub. A 16 ounce tub will work perfectly. Or you can make it from scratch if you prefer.
  • Marshmallows – We love to add Marshmallow Stars to the fruit pizza but they are optional.

📖 Substitutions

Need to trade out some ingredients? Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Sugar Cookie Dough: Instead of refrigerated sugar cookie dough, you can make your own from scratch or use any other type of cookie dough such as shortbread or even a pre-made pie crust.
  • Blueberries: If you don’t have fresh blueberries, you can substitute them with blackberries, black grapes, or even small pieces of dark purple plums to maintain the color contrast in the flag design.
  • Raspberries: In place of raspberries, you can use halved strawberries, red currants, pitted cherries, or small pieces of red plums for the red stripes on your fruit pizza.

📖 Variations

Store-bought cookie dough is a great option for this recipe. But if you feel adventurous and want to make your own, you definitely can.

Homemade Sugar Cookie Dough: To make your own sugar cookie dough, combine 2 ¾ cups all-purpose flour, 1 teaspoon baking soda, ½ teaspoon baking powder, 1 cup unsalted butter (softened), 1 ½ cups white sugar, 1 egg, and 2 teaspoons vanilla extract in a bowl. Mix until a dough forms and then refrigerate for at least 1 hour before using.

👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make American Flag Fruit Pizza

This fruit pizza recipe is broken into 3 components:

  1. Create the pizza base
  2. Add the frosting
  3. Finish with fruit

Be sure to allow your sugar cookie crust cool completely before decorating! 

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-4 to make American flag fruit pizza.

STEP 1. Prepare the equipment. Set your oven to 350F or 325F if using a non-stick baking sheet. Take a 13 x 9-inch baking pan and cover it with parchment paper.

STEP 2. Slice the cookie dough. Slice the cookie dough roll into slices around ¼-inch thick. Press them into the baking pan evenly.

STEP 3. Cook the dough. Cook the dough for 15 minutes until it is golden brown then remove it and allow it to cool completely on the cooking rack. (Image 1).

STEP 4. Add the frosting. Take the tub of frosting and spread it across the whole of the cooled pizza base. (Image 2).

STEP 5. Add the berries. Start with 5 rows of blueberries from the top left corner where the stars would be on the blue portion of the flag pattern. (Image 3).

Then add the raspberry stripes starting at the top and leave a space between each row to create the red and white stripes. (Image 4).

Slice of 4th of July fruit pizza on white plate.

STEP 6. Pipe the frosting stripes. Now take a #1M star piping tip and add a row of stars on the white areas between each row of raspberries. If you are adding the marshmallow stars, add these on top of the blueberries.

Star marshmallows added to American flag fruit pizza.

STEP 7. Cool and serve. Allow the pizza to chill in the refrigerator then serve!

American flag fruit pizza on sugar cookie crust with slice taken out.

💭 Recipe Pro Tips

  • Let the dough soften first. Be sure to set the tube of dough out 10 minutes ahead to allow time to soften so you can press the dough onto a baking sheet.
  • Pat dry your fruits: To prevent your fruit pizza from becoming soggy, make sure to wash and thoroughly pat dry your fruits with a paper towel before arranging them on the pizza.
  • Add a glaze: To give your fruit pizza a glossy finish and prevent the fruit from drying out, you can brush a simple glaze made of fruit preserves or apricot jam (heated and strained) over the top of the fruit.
  • Use a pizza cutter or sharp knife: When cutting your fruit pizza, use a pizza cutter or a sharp knife to ensure clean, even slices. Be sure to cut through the crust and fruit layers in one motion to avoid tearing the toppings.

📋 Recipe FAQs

Can you make the fruit pizza recipe ahead of time?

To ensure the best texture and taste, assemble your fruit pizza as close to serving time as possible. This will help prevent the crust from getting soggy and keep the fruits looking fresh.

Do I have to use sugar cookie dough for the base?

No, you don’t have to use sugar cookie dough. You can substitute it with other types of cookie dough, like shortbread or even a pre-made pie crust.

Can I make a fruit pizza with gluten-free or vegan sugar cookie dough?

You can use a gluten-free or vegan sugar cookie dough recipe to create a fruit pizza that meets your dietary needs. Just make sure to adjust the frosting and fruit toppings accordingly to maintain a gluten-free or vegan dessert.

🍽 What to Serve with American Flag Fruit Pizza

American flag fruit pizza is a fun and delicious dessert on its own, but you can also serve it with additional treats to make your celebration even more special. Here are some ideas:

  • Ice cream or frozen yogurt: A scoop of vanilla ice cream or frozen yogurt pairs well with the fruity flavors of the fruit pizza and adds a cool, creamy contrast.
  • Whipped cream: Serve a dollop of whipped cream on the side for an extra touch of indulgence, or do a Cool Whip Fruit Dip!
  • Fruit salad: Prepare a simple fruit salad with a mix of seasonal fruits to complement the fruit pizza and offer a lighter, refreshing option.
  • Grilled fruit skewers: For a fun and interactive dessert option, grill fruit skewers with a variety of fruits like pineapple, peaches, and strawberries. This can be a great addition to a summer barbecue alongside the fruit pizza.
  • Patriotic-themed treats: Offer another patriotic dessert like red, white, and blue rice krispie treats, cake pops, or decorated sugar cookies to enhance the celebratory atmosphere. Or this 4th of July Dip, looks adorable sitting right next to it!
  • Cheese platter: Assemble a cheese platter with a variety of cheeses, crackers, and nuts for guests who prefer a savory option alongside their dessert.
  • Chocolate fondue: Set up a chocolate fondue station with marshmallows, pretzels, and additional fruits like strawberries and bananas for dipping.
  • Snack Mix: I mean, these Patriotic Muddy Buddies would look adorable, and be delicious sitting next to this fruit pizza, don’t you think?

❄️ Storage

Store any leftover fruit pizza covered in the refrigerator for up to 2 days. The crust may become soft over time due to the moisture from the fruit and cream cheese layer.

It’s not recommended to freeze a fruit pizza, as the texture of the fruits and frosting may be compromised once thawed. However, you can freeze the sugar cookie dough base separately for up to 3 months.

🫐 More Fruit Recipes You’ll Love

If you have some blueberries left, why not try this simple Blueberry Waffles Recipe as a tasty breakfast idea? Or you could pop the raspberries into a Spring Mix Apple Raspberry Salad.

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

American flag fruit pizza on marble counter
Print Pin
5 from 5 votes

American Flag Fruit Pizza

This red, white and blue dessert pizza, is a delicious and simple patriotic dessert for your next holiday party!
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Cooling Time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes
Servings 24 servings
Calories 192kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 16.5 ounce roll refrigerated sugar cookie dough
  • 2 x 16 ounce tub store-bought frosting white
  • 1 pint blueberries washed and dried
  • 12 ounces raspberries washed and dried
  • star marshmallows (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 350°F (or 325°F if using a nonstick baking sheet). Prepare a 13 x 9-inch baking pan with parchment paper.
  • Slice your roll of cookie dough into ¼-inch thin slices, and then press the slices of sugar cookie dough into the pan evenly.
  • Bake for 15 minutes or until the cookie is beginning to turn golden brown. Allow the cookie to cool completely on a cooling rack.
  • Once cool, take (1) 16-ounce tub of icing and spread it evenly over the entire cookie.
  • Now let’s create 5 rows of blueberries in the top left corner where the stars would be on the flag.
  • Next, use the raspberries as the stripes on the flag. Starting at the top, place a row of raspberries, leave about an inch of space, and create another row. Repeat until you reach the bottom of the “flag.”.
  • Place your other frosting tub in a piping bag with a #1M star piping tip. Pipe a row of stars in between each row of raspberries.
  • Serve chilled, and enjoy!

Notes

See blog post for more tips to help make this recipe a success!
Top Tip: Be sure to allow your sugar cookie base to cool completely before decorating!
Storage: Store any leftovers in the refrigerator for up to 2 days. Do note that the crust may become soft over time due to the moisture from the fruit and cream cheese layer.

Nutrition

Serving: 1slice | Calories: 192kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 2mg | Sodium: 96mg | Potassium: 72mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 23g | Vitamin A: 23IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 7mg | Iron: 1mg

Brownie Mix Cookies

Brownie Mix Cookies: An easy cookie recipe that brownie lovers will adore! Who knew a box of brownie mix was the secret to delicious cookies?

This easy recipe is similar to our red velvet cake mix cookies but uses a boxed brownie mix to create the perfect cookie for all you chocolate lovers!

Stack of brownie mix cookies.

❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

I’m a big fan of a simple cookie; something you can whip up without much preparation. (Like these funfetti cake mix cookies too!) I’m also a big fan of chocolate…specifically anything with a chewy fudge center, like this brownie recipe with cream cheese frosting! Add some cherries to the too, like in our chocolate cherry cookies, and I’m in love.

This easy brownie mix cookies recipe is exactly what I’m all about- it only needs 6 ingredients (one of which is a brownie box mix), it can be made super quickly, and it gives you all the yummy goodness of gooey brownies in cookie form! 

If that isn’t the best thing since chocolate chip cookies were invented, I don’t know what is. It might sound a little bit dramatic but these easy brownie cookies really might be some of the best cookies ever. 

The best part is that you can customize them to fit your personal preference- see the variations listed below!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🛒 Ingredients

You can make cookies with brownie mix…who knew? All you need is a box brownie mix and a few other simple ingredients you can find at your grocery store! You can skip to the recipe card if you’re ready to get started.

  • 1- 18.3 ounce Brownie Mix box (I used Duncan Hines Chewy Fudgy Brownies)
  • ½ cup butter (1 stick) softened (or ½ cup oil)
  • 2 large eggs
  • 1- 3.4 oz box vanilla Jell-O instant pudding
  • 3 tablespoons water room temperature
  • 1 cup chocolate chips
Ingredients for brownie mix cookies.

👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make Brownie Mix Cookies

  1. Heat oven to 350 degrees F.
  2. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside (you can also use a silicone mat in place of the parchment paper).
  3. In a large bowl, mix the butter and half of the brownie mix with an electric mixer. Mix until combined.
Brownie mix and butter in glass mixing bowl.
  1. Add eggs and water and mix until incorporated.
Brownie mix with egg, milk and other ingredients in glass bowl.
  1. Add the remaining brownie mix and the Jell-O instant pudding. Mix until all ingredients are combined. You will have a thick batter at this point (almost closer to a thick dough).
  2. Add the chocolate chips and fold them into your brownie mix cookie batter with a spatula.
Chocolate chips poured in to brownie batter cookie mix.
  1. Using a medium cookie scoop, scoop 1.5 tablespoons of brownie batter like a scoop of ice cream and place it onto the prepared baking sheet. Be sure to keep the dough balls 1 ½ inch apart as they will spread.
Scoop dough onto prepared cookie sheet.
Brownie mix cookie batter balls on cookie sheet.
  1. Bake in your 350 degree oven for 11 -12 minutes or until the edges are set. The cookies will have a fudgy center and crispy edges.
Baked brownie mix cookies on cookie sheet.
  1. Let it cool on the cookie sheet for 2-3 minutes. They are still very soft when they come out of the oven. Waiting an extra minute or two before transferring them will help them keep their shape!
  2. Transfer to a wire rack to cool completely.
Baked brownie mix cookies on cooling rack.
  1. Serve and enjoy! Note: Try serving these while they are warm with a scoop of vanilla ice cream on the side- yum!

Don’t they look so similar to my Devil’s Food cake mix cookies?

Brownie Mix Cookies on black cooling rack.

🧾 Substitutions

Here are a few helpful substitutions you can make if you find yourself missing an ingredient:

Butter – can be replaced with vegetable oil or coconut oil

Brownie Mix- I used Duncan Hines Chewy Fudgy Brownie Mix, but you could easily replace this with a Betty Crocker, Pillsbury or Ghiradelli brownie mix. Any fudge brownie mix would do the trick! If you have chocolate cake mix though, you can use it to make these cake mix turtle cookies!

📖 Variations

This brownie mix cookies recipe is a pretty great recipe as it is, but if you’re the creative type there are SO many ways you can personalize it to make the best cookies for you. Next time you make these, why not try…

  • Baking Chips: Adding an additional ¼ cup of a second type of chip to your cookie dough. You could try peanut butter chips, white chocolate chips, butterscotch chips, or extra chocolate chips/morsels (this is my favorite variation as it gives these rich cookies an extra fudgy brownie texture).
  • Salt: Sprinkle the top of the cookie with flaky sea salt while it is still warm.
Brownie Mix Cookies

❄️ Storage

Since these are basically the best brownie mix cookies ever, chances are there won’t be any left to store. BUT, on the off chance that you do have some extras, store them in an airtight container on the counter for 3-4 days or in the fridge for up to a week. 

Side note: These chocolate cookies will freeze well after baking. You can store them in a freezer-safe, airtight container in the freezer for up to a month. 

💡 Expert Tips and FAQs

What’s the best way to serve these cookies?

These cookies are versatile! You could serve them just as they are with a glass of milk on the side, serve them warm with a scoop of ice cream beside them, or even get creative and turn them into ice cream sandwiches (soften a bit of vanilla ice cream, place a scoop between two cookies and refreeze)!

Does it matter which type of boxed brownie mix I use?

No, any brownie mix will work! The ones that say they make “fudgy” brownies will probably give you the most fudgy cookies.

Can I freeze these cookies BEFORE baking so I have the dough ready and can make freshly baked cookies in a pinch?

We think you could, yes! We haven’t tried it yet, but this is what we would do…

Make your cookie dough, scoop it onto a cookie sheet as the recipe calls for and then freeze in the freezer until the dough scoops are solid (this keeps them from sticking together). Once frozen, take them off the cookie sheet and place them in an airtight and freezer-safe container or bag.

When you are ready to bake them, place them on a parchment-lined baking sheet and either let them thaw out before baking or add a few minutes to the baking time (2-4 should do it). Just watch the cookies near the end of the baking time and when the edges look golden brown and the center looks “set” (not wiggly) they should be done. Then let them cool as the recipe directs.

🍫Brownie Desserts

If you love anything brownie, you’ll also love these brownie recipes that are popular:

If you love short-cuts in the kitchen, then you’ll also love these 3-Ingredient Brown Sugar Cookies!

Recipe

Brownie mix cookies stacked on top of one another
Print Pin
5 from 9 votes

Brownie Mix Cookies

Brownie Mix Cookies: An easy cookie recipe that brownie lovers will adore! Who knew a box of brownie mix was the secret to delicious cookies!
Course Dessert, Snack
Cuisine American
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 11 minutes
Total Time 16 minutes
Servings 28 cookies
Calories 67kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1- 18.3 oz box Brownie Mix I used Duncan Hines Chewy Fudgy Brownies
  • ½ cup butter (1 stick) softened at room temperature (or ½ cup oil)
  • 2 large eggs
  • 3.4 oz box vanilla Jell-O instant pudding
  • 3 Tablespoons water room temperature
  • 1 cup chocolate chips

Instructions

  • Heat oven to 350 degrees F.
  • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside (you can also use a silicone mat in place of the parchment paper).
  • In a large bowl, mix the butter and half of the brownie mix with an electric mixer. Mix until combined.
  • Add eggs and water and mix until incorporated.
  • Add the remaining brownie mix and the Jell-O instant pudding. Mix until all ingredients are combined. You will have a thick batter at this point (almost closer to a thick dough).
  • Add the chocolate chips and fold them into your brownie mix cookie batter with a spatula.
  • Using a medium cookie scoop, scoop 1.5 tablespoons of brownie batter like a scoop of ice cream and place it onto the prepared baking sheet. Be sure to keep the dough balls 1 ½ inch apart as they will spread.
  • Bake in your 350 degree oven for 11 -12 minutes or until the edges are set.
  • Let it cool on the cookie sheet for 2-3 minutes. They are still very soft when they come out of the oven. Waiting an extra minute or two before transferring them will help them keep their shape!
  • Transfer to a wire rack to cool completely.
  • Serve and enjoy!
    Note: Try serving these while they are warm with a scoop of vanilla ice cream on the side- yum!

Notes

Storage: Store cookies in airtight container on the counter for 3-4 days or in the fridge for up to a week. 
Freezing: These chocolate cookies will freeze well after baking. You can store them in a freezer-safe, airtight container in the freezer for up to a month. 

Nutrition

Serving: 1cookie | Calories: 67kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 23mg | Sodium: 39mg | Potassium: 6mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 135IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 1mg

Turkey Sliders

Turkey Sliders are the perfect party appetizer recipe or game-day snack! These little sandwiches are easy to make, packed with flavor, and perfect for feeding a crowd.

Stacked turkey sliders with melted cheese.

With sliced turkey, a little garlic, and melty cheese, these sliders are sure to be a hit. Plus, they’re so simple to customize with your favorite toppings and condiments, a lot like our popular cheeseburger sliders recipe that so many have fallen in love with! Next, you’ll want to try these roast beef sliders or this corned beef sliders recipe, that are full of flavor.

Looking for more ideas to use up that pack of Hawaiian rolls? Why not try these Fried Chicken Sliders or something a little different with the Sloppy Joes Sliders?

Or, if you’re looking for a larger slider idea, using the bigger sliders, making these salmon sliders make more of a meal than a small appetizer slider.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why This Recipe Works

  • It uses a few ingredients: With only 5 ingredients, this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand.
  • Great leftovers recipe: Use up leftover turkey or whatever cheese you have in the refrigerator, as long as it melts well
  • Ready in 30 minutes: This is a simple recipe to make that takes around 30 minutes so ideal when you don’t have a lot of time.

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Ingredients labeled, sitting on counter.
  • Turkey – We use deli turkey for this recipe because it was sliced really thinly and so heated up well.
  • Cheese – Provolone sliced cheese is perfect for sliders because they melt nicely.
  • Garlic salt – This adds more flavor to the rolls.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Turkey – if you have leftover turkey, you can use this in the recipe. Check out this recipe on Cranberry Turkey Sliders to get the best tips on how to make them. Or these pinwheel sandwiches are absolutely delicious to make with turkey!
  • Cheese – any good melting cheese will work well in sliders and bring their own taste. Monterey Jack and Cheddar are two great examples.

Variations

If you don’t have Hawaiian rolls for your sliders, there are a few other types of bread or buns that can work as a replacement. You can try using slider buns, dinner rolls, potato rolls, or even ciabatta bread or sliced baguette. Keep in mind that the texture and flavor may vary slightly depending on your choice of bread, so choose one that complements the flavors in your turkey slider recipe.

How to Make Turkey Sliders

This is a very simple recipe that only really has three steps to make. This means if you are looking for a simple but tasty dish, it is ideal.

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Preheat oven to 350 degrees F.

Steps 1-4 turkey sliders, showing how to build the meat and cheese on buns.

STEP 1 and 2. Prepare the rolls. Slice the 12-pack of Hawaiian rolls in half, to where it makes a top bun and bottom buns. Place the bottom layer of buns in the prepared baking dish.

STEP 3. Add turkey. Next, add a layer of sliced turkey to the buns, making sure to cover the entire layer of buns.

STEP 4. Add cheese. Place cheese on top of the turkey, making sure to cover as much of the turkey as possible with each piece.

Steps 5-8 on building turkey sliders, melting butter, brushing, covering with foil and baking.

STEP 5. Garlic butter. Melt butter and stir in garlic salt.

STEP 6. Brush buns. Place the top buns on top of cheese and brush garlic butter on top of the rolls.

TIP: You can save some of the garlic butter to brush on after they are baked.

STEP 7. Cook the sliders. Cover the rolls with foil and bake for 25 minutes at 350F.

STEP 8. Final bake. Remove the foil and cook for another 5 minutes.

Brush on the remaining garlic butter if you reserved any for this step.

Turkey sliders on parchment paper.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Sprinkle with parsley. Finish the recipe with a sprinkling of fresh chopped parsley before you serve.
  • Watch the melted cheese. The cheese will be hot when it comes out of the oven so make sure little fingers don’t get burned.
  • Spicy Turkey Sliders. Drizzle the turkey sliders with hot sauce if you like things spicy. We make these buffalo chicken sliders when we’re feeling the heat.
Turkey sliders stacked on cutting board.

Recipe FAQs

How do you cut dinner rolls for sliders?

To cut dinner rolls for sliders, first, make sure the rolls are slightly chilled or at room temperature. This will help to prevent them from squishing and will give you cleaner cuts. Next, place the entire package of rolls onto a large cutting board and use a serrated knife to slice horizontally through the middle of all the rolls at the same time, creating a top and bottom half. Then, cut vertically along the seams of the rolls to separate them into individual buns. Use a sharp knife to cut through the layers of the bun without compressing them. Your dinner rolls are now ready to be used as buns for your turkey sliders.

Can I make turkey sliders ahead of time?

Yes you can make the sliders ahead of time. Add all the ingredients into the rolls and store them in the refrigerator until you are ready to cook them. You may need to cook a little longer if they are cold when going in the oven.

How do you keep sliders from getting soggy?

Sliders can become soggy if they sit for too long after being assembled. One way to prevent this from happening is to add a layer of a moisture barrier between the bread and the toppings. This can be done by spreading a thin layer of butter or mayonnaise on the inside of both the top and bottom buns before adding the toppings. Another way to prevent sogginess is to serve the sliders immediately after assembling them, while the bread is still fresh and the toppings are warm.

What to Serve with Turkey Sliders

Turkey slider sandwiches are a delicious and satisfying meal on their own, but if you’re serving them for a party or gathering, you might want to consider pairing them with some tasty sides or snacks. Here are a few ideas:

These sides and snacks will complement the flavors of the turkey sliders and provide a well-rounded meal for your guests.

Refrigeration, Freeze, and Thaw

Refrigeration: To store sliced turkey sliders, place them in an airtight container and store in the refrigerator. You can also wrap them tightly in plastic wrap or aluminum foil before storing in the refrigerator. Sliders are best when consumed within 3-4 days of preparation.

Freeze: You can freeze these turkey sliders! We prefer wrapping the sliders (once they’ve cooled) in Glad Press’n Seal, and then place in a freezer bag. Freeze them for up to 3 months.

Thaw: To thaw these turkey sliders, place them in the refrigerator overnight, and then place in a covered baking dish, in the oven, and bake at 350 until heated through, which was about 20 minutes for us. This could vary based on how cold/frozen the sliders may still be.

More Sandwich Recipes You’ll Love

Still want to try a new sandwich recipe? You could also make some Hawaiian Breakfast Sandwiches for a great start to the day. Or try what I’m sure is the Best Egg Salad as a sandwich filler. You could even go for a classic grilled cheese with a twist by trying this Caprese Chicken Sandwich!

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Turkey slider sitting on top of other turkey sliders with cheese.
Print Pin
5 from 4 votes

Turkey Sliders

Turkey sliders are great for a warm lunch option or party appetizer. The sweet flavors of the Hawaiian rolls combined with the salty flavors of cheese and turkey create the perfect combination.
Course Appetizer, Lunch
Cuisine American
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 12 sliders
Calories 198kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 pound turkey sliced very thin from the deli (Or your preferred thickness and type.)
  • 6 ounces provolone cheese sliced
  • ½ teaspoon garlic salt
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 12 Hawaiian slider rolls
  • chopped parsley if desired

Instructions

  • Prepare the rolls. Slice the 12-pack of Hawaiian rolls in half, to where it makes a top bun and bottom buns. Place the bottom layer of buns in the prepared baking dish.
    12 Hawaiian slider rolls
  • Add turkey. Next, add a layer of sliced turkey to the buns, making sure to cover the entire layer of buns.
    1 pound turkey
  • Add cheese. Place cheese on top of the turkey, making sure to cover as much of the turkey as possible with each piece.
    6 ounces provolone cheese
  • Garlic butter. Melt butter and stir in garlic salt.
    ½ teaspoon garlic salt, 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • Brush buns. Place the top buns on top of cheese and brush garlic butter on top of the rolls. TIP: You can save some of the garlic butter to brush on after they are baked.
  • Cook the sliders. Cover the rolls with foil and bake for 25 minutes at 350F.
  • Final bake. Remove the foil and cook for another 5 minutes.
    Brush on the remaining garlic butter if you reserved any for this step.
    Sprinkle on chopped parsley if desired.
    chopped parsley

Video

Notes

Storage Insructions:
Refrigeration: To store sliced turkey sliders, place them in an airtight container and store in the refrigerator. Best when consumed within 3-4 days of preparation.
Freeze: Wrap the sliders (once they’ve cooled) in Glad Press’n Seal, and then place them in a freezer bag. Freeze them for up to 3 months.
Thaw: Place them in the refrigerator overnight, and then place in a covered baking dish, in the oven, and bake at 350 until heated through, for about 20 minutes.

Nutrition

Serving: 1slider | Calories: 198kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 50mg | Sodium: 329mg | Potassium: 109mg | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 194IU | Calcium: 112mg | Iron: 0.4mg

20 Picnic Food Ideas for Couples

If you want to do something special for your sweetie, you are going to love these picnic food ideas for couples. Outdoor dates can be so romantic. With a comfy picnic set up, tasty snacks, and some good music, you are sure to have a really lovely time together, without crowds of people or pricey restaurant meals. You could even have a picnic for an at-home date night idea, by creating an indoor picnic menu or make a charcuterie board with salami roses for a romantic touh.

If you aren’t sure what to take along on your picnic, you are in the right place. I have gathered some of my favorite picnic foods for couples! From seasoned crackers to munch on with a nice cheese, as an easy summer snack idea; to turkey club sliders which are the perfect size for a picnic. I know you will find a few recipes to try.

Image collage of picnic food ideas for couples.

If you’re going away for the weekend or just spending a weekend at home, make sure to also get my tips for how to prepare for a romantic weekend with your husband!

Food Ideas for a Romantic Picnic

Spicy ranch crackers close-up.

Spicy Ranch Crackers

These spicy ranch crackers are awesome to much on as you lounge on a picnic blanket. Pair with your favorite cheese and thin slices of meat for a grown up charcuterie lunch.

Strawberry jam bruschetta on bread.

Strawberry Bruschetta

This take on Bruschetta is perfect for a picnic. The strawberries with a hint of heat taste just like summer when piled onto a cream cheese crusty bread! It would even look amazing on one of these charcuterie boards.

Homemade Chex mix in a wooden bowl.

Nuts and Bolts

This simple snack makes for a really great picnic offering. A handful here and there will sustain you as you soak up some summer sun. Or, go spicy and try this Honey and Sriracha Mix.

Chicken salad sandwich on white plate, next to apple slices.

Curry Chicken Salad

Juicy grapes and savory chicken come together to make the best summer salad. Tuck this tasty salad into a flaky croissant for an easy-to-pack picnic food for couples.

Egg salad on a croissant with lettuce and bacon.

Best Ever Egg Salad

This egg salad sandwich is easy to whip up for a picnic lunch. It has such a creamy texture. After one bite you are sure to agree this recipe is the best ever.

Chipotle Chicken Melt

This 4 ingredient Chicken Chipotle Melt comes together in just a few minutes and is cheesy and delicious.

Chicken Caesar pasta salad.

Chicken Cesar Pasta Salad

Bring great flavor to a simple-to-make picnic food. This recipe pairs chicken Caesar salad with pasta for a filling picnic option that travels well and tastes amazing on a summer day.

Summer side salad in white bowl, with avocado slices on top.

Summer Side Salad

This salad is packed with fresh greens, crunchy nuts, fresh strawberries, and a few other ingredients, making it the perfect picnic salad idea!

Tuna salad on sliced bread.

Best Tuna Salad

This easy to make tuna salad uses red onions, celery, and a few tasty herbs and spices to make a perfect picnic lunch option. Serve on your favorite bread with chips on the side for a classic combination for a picnic.

Honey lime fruit salad in white bowl.

Honey Lime Fruit Salad

This fruit salad has a delicious and simple dressing that will really make the flavors of the fruit stand out.

Crab salad in white bowl.

Crab Salad

Crab salad makes for a really great picnic option. Serve it on bread, with crackers, or wrapped in leafy lettuce for a delicious cool meal worth sharing.

Zesty pasta salad in mason jar.

Zesty Pasta Salad

Arrange pasta salad in a mason jar so it transports well, and you have a delicious meal waiting for you when you’re ready. Storing the dressing on the bottom makes serving this dish, fresh, and easy!

Small triangles of peanut butter and jelly sandwiches, stacked on top of one another.

Peanut Butter and Jelly Sandwiches

You can’t go wrong with a simple classic like peanut butter and jelly sammy! Make a few of these with a favorite bread to have a simple and satisfying picnic idea. Homemade raspberry jam is perfect with peanut butter.

Turkey club sliders.

Turkey Club Sliders

These little sandwiches are so tasty. Pile them high with turkey, bacon and cheese for a really great lunch that is easy to make ahead and take along in your picnic basket.

Rice krispie treats on wooden cutting board.

Rice Krispie Treats

Rice krispie treats are a favorite snack and dessert for so many! They’re easy to make and perfect to tag along on your picnic.

Close-up of pinwheel sandwich on cutting board.

Pinwheels Sandwiches

A few bites are all it takes to finish a pinwheel, but they are so tasty you will want to nibble on a few on your couples’ picnic.

A bowl of everything but the bagel dip with vegetables and crackers around it.

Everything But the Bagel Dip

This dip adds so much flavor to your picnic. Serve with crackers or veggies, and snack away on this delicious dip recipe.

Layers of meat and peppers on hawaiian buns
Italian Sliders Recipe

Italian Sliders

If you need a sandwich with some substance, then these Italian sliders are just the thing to make. This sandwich is piled high with meat and cheese for a filling option.

Old fashioned ham salad sandwiches on wooden cutting board.

Old Fashioned Ham Salad

Using just a few simple ingredients, this ham salad transports well, and tastes delicious on your favorite bread or dipped with your favorite crackers.

Booty dip in a bowl with graham crackers on top.

Booty Dip

Dessert has never been so decadent! These are with nutella and berries and lots of chocolate for a summer indulgence to take along on your outdoor dinner date.

Creamy peanut butter yogurt dip is shown in the center of the photo on an orange background. There is a spoon on the left and graham crackers for dipping on the right.

Peanut Butter Yogurt Dip

Perfectly paired with your favorite fruit, crackers or cookies, this easy sweet dip recipe will be great for your picnic!

Picnic Drink Ideas

Don’t forget the drinks! You can make a delicious sweet tea, lemonade or this fruit punch recipe that so many have been loving.

Tips for a Perfect Picnic Date

If you’re planning the perfect picnic, here are some tips to help you plan the perfect one:

  • Choose a scenic location that offers plenty of space to spread out from other picnickers.
  • Pack plenty of drinks and napkins.
  • Bring an outdoor game.
  • Dress Comfortably.
  • Prepare for your time together with these tips for preparing for a romantic weekend!

We love gathering recipes for you, depending on cuisine, ingredient, holiday, or season! See all of our amazing recipe collections!

35 Easy Summer Snacks Ideas

The best summer snacks are light and full of flavors. They make use of fresh fruits and veggies and aren’t too heavy on a hot day. If you are looking for some new summer snack ideas, you are going to love these recipes! They have been tried and tweaked to perfection so you can get a delicious snack with every recipe.

See more of our easy snack recipes for any time of year and our summer dinner ideas to prep you for your summer, especially for a picnic! Or, if it’s too hot to be outside, make sure you see these indoor picnic food ideas for a treat at home.

Summer Snack Ideas

From a spicy and creamy artichoke dip that is just as good as any starter from a chain restaurant, to pretty in pink chocolate-covered strawberries that make for a perfectly portioned after-dinner treat. I am sure you will find a few recipes that you can’t wait to try. They’d also be great food ideas for a picnic if you’re planning to take advantage of the warm weather.

You might want to save this collection of 35 Summer Snack Ideas to your snack ideas board.

Jalapeno artichoke dip with chips

Jalapeno Artichoke Dip

This easy dip has 6 ingredients and is perfect for a summer snack. It is creamy, spicy and pairs perfectly with chips or veggies!

nuts and bolts snack mix in a brown bowl

Nuts and Bolts

This is the snack to make and pack for a road trip or to take along for a beach day. It is easy to make with simple ingredients and it tastes amazing, no matter where you snack on it.

Mexican street corn dip in a white bowl with lime

Elote Dip

Get street corn flavor in a tasty dip for summer snacking. Take this elote dip along to a picnic, or to a BBQ for authentic flavors that can feed a crowd.

fruits on a platter with dip and cookies

Fruit Board

This platter of fresh fruit is just the thing to serve on a hot summer day. Luscious juicy fruits taste so good with this creamy dip. 

Oreo cookie dip with cookies and pretzels

Oreo Dip

If you love cookies and cream flavors, you are going to want to save this decadent oreo dip recipe. You can dip cookies, graham crackers or fruits into this for a dreamy indulgent treat.

Chocolate Rice Krispie treats on a tray with a bowl of chocolate chips beside them.

Chocolate Rice Krispie Treats

These no bake treats are so good! Kids and adults alike are going to reach for a second. They have so much fluffy chocolate flavor in a tidy little square that packs great for a road trip or a camping trip.

Taco dip in a baking dish

Taco Layer Dip

This dip has layers of meat, cheese, veggies and cream cheese for a totally delicious summer snack that can feed a crowd. Serve with chips or tortilla shells for a really tasty option that will fuel hours of summer fun.

Tater tots with cheese and jalapeno peppers

Loaded Tater Tots 

Take tots from the side dish category and turn them into a crispy, cheesy snack! This recipe cooks in the air fryer for a satisfying snack you can serve anytime! These are perfect for cocktail hour with friends.

Chocolate Dipped Waffle Cones

Make ice cream a special snack with this easy chocolate dipped waffle bowl. Soft ice cream paired with a crispy bowl and plenty of sweet chocolate make for a memorable goodie to share.

Spicy ranch crackers close-up.

Spicy Ranch Crackers

This simple snack is seriously so good! Make spicy ranch crackers for a budget friendly snack that you won’t be able to stop munching on.

Marshmallow Fruit Dip 

You are going to love this easy marshmallow fluff fruit dip. It tastes amazing with berries, pineapple and apples! You also will love this with graham crackers.

Red, white and blue layered cupcakes

4th of July Layered Cupcakes

These layered cupcakes are popping with festive colors! Make a few dozen of these and take them to a 4th of July picnic for a really fun dessert.

guacamole wontons with avocados

Avocado Wontons

This recipe makes for the best wontons to serve with chips and salsa for a unique summer snack. If you like avocados, you are going to want to grab 2 of these because they are so good!

Everything bagel dip with veggies and crackers

Everything Bagel Dip

Put your garden fresh veggies and pair them with this dreamy, creamy dip! It has all of the flavors of an everything bagel for a healthier snack option.

easy pico de gallo with tortilla chips

Garden Fresh Pico de Gallo

Garden fresh onions, tomatoes and herbs make for the best summer snack! Thispico de gallo  is easy to make and tastes so good! Pair this with a summer cocktail if you want to unwind with the freshest flavors.

edible chocolate chip cookie dough in a glass jar

Edible Cookie Dough

If you are craving cookies but don’t want to turn on the oven and heat up the house, check out this edible cookie dough recipe. Store a jar of this in the fridge for a fast summer snack on demand.

Mixed berry trifle

Mixed Berry Trifles

Make these trifles in individual jars for a portable summer snack! These are full of fresh summer berries for a pretty and delicious after dinner sweet.

booty dip with wafers

Booty Dip

Don’t give up on a sweet treat because it is too hot to bake. This booty dip is a viral sensation for good reason. It is nothing short of amazing! So decadent and tasty and easy to make.

Rice krispie stars layered with red, white and blue

Red, White and Blue Star Rice Krispie Treats

This festive summer snack needs no baking and is perfect to pack in a picnic basket and share as you watch fireworks. Everyone will love the colorful layers and shape!

cool whip fruit salad in a bowl

Cool Whip Fruit Salad

This fluffy fruit salad uses cool whip to make a delicious sweet treat to share. You will love how this tastes after a hot day in the sun.

Cowboy queso dip with chips

Cowboy Queso

This cheesy dip is packed with tasty things! Black beans, corn, and avocado make this dip hearty enough to satisfy a crowd of hungry snackers!

strawberry jalapeno bruschetta

Strawberry Jalapeno Bruschetta

I know you are going to love this easy snack! It is sweet, spicy and so easy to make on a summer afternoon. This pairs well with a glass of wine or a glass of fruit punch.

Blue cheese dip with crackers and veggies

Blue Cheese Dip

This dip is so flavorful! Make it and enjoy with chips or fresh veggies like peppers and celery for a summer snack that is very satisfying. This is great as a side with burger night too!

graham cracker crumbs sprinkled on top of strawberries

Cheesecake Stuffed Berries

This recipe for cheesecake stuffed berries is perfect for summer snacking! They are sweet, tart and creamy!

Fruity pebbles marshmallow treats

Fruity Pebbles Treats

Fruity pebbles make this unique marshmallow treat pop with colors and flavors! Make these at the last minute for a treat you can share with everyone.

smoky cheese dip with fresh veggies

Smoked Queso 

If you are entertaining on the patio, you are going to want to dig this smoked queso! It is awesome with chips, veggies, or even drizzled over a taco if you like.

Oreo rice krispie treats stacked on a plate

Oreo Rice Krispie Treats

Give your oreo cookies a whole new experience by mixing them into rice krispie treats! These are so good! You are definitely going to make these to take to the next summer party.

key lime cookies with a bite taken out

Key Lime Pie Cookies

Cookies are always a good idea, and this recipe is no exception! Make these crumbl copycats when you crave a fruity snack. These soft cookies have the best tart kick to them for an afternoon pick me up.

peanut butter yogurt dip

Peanut Butter Yogurt Dip

This dip is the ultimate cool and creamy dessert. It has peanut butter, honey and yogurt to make a healthy sweet snack that everyone will want to dip a fruit or cookie into.

Cheese board with fruit and nuts.

How to Make a Cheese Board

Pair meat (you can even make salami roses) cheese, fruit and crackers together for a snack that you can share. You can also add in your favorite options to make this cheese board unique to your taste buds. 

Skinny No Bake Cookie Oatmeal

If you have been craving cookies, then this skinny oatmeal makes a guilt free summer treat you can munch on without the guilt. This tastes so much like no bake cookies. You are going to love it.

Air fryer apple chips

Air Fryer Apple Chips

Take a healthy air fryer snack along on all of your adventures this summer with these crunchy apple chips. These are satisfying, nutritious and so easy to make.

Best ever guacamole in a bowl

Easy Guacamole Recipe 

Get fresh flavor in every bite with the best ever homemade guacamole. I know you are going to want to make this every week for a summer snack to savor with fresh veggies.

Lemon puppy chow in white bowl, sitting next to lemons.

White Chocolate Lemon Puppy Chow

White chocolate and lemon are so good together in this sweet and crunchy snack. Make this puppy chow in a big bowl and pass it out for a light snack that will fuel summer fun until you stop for dinner.

pink chocolate coated strawberries

Pink Chocolate Strawberries

After your next trip to the strawberry patch, you have to make these pretty pink chocolate covered berries. They are so delicious and easy to make. The results are completely luscious.

Which of these snacks do you want to make first? I would love for you to leave a comment and let me know what you like to munch on in the summer.

Tips for Making Summer Snacks

Since you’re looking for ideas for snacks for the summertime, here are some tips to keep in mind:

  • Use fresh ingredients whenever possible. Your garden is a great source of snack ingredients, as is your local farmers market!
  • Be creative with your fresh ingredients to discover new flavor combinations that taste amazing.
  • Store your snacks in an airtight container to keep them fresh until you are ready to serve them.
  • Keep them cold in the fridge, or nestled on a bed of ice to keep your snacks fresh in the summer sun.

We love gathering recipes for you, depending on cuisine, ingredient, holiday, or season! See all of our amazing recipe collections!

Ham Salad Recipe

You’ll definitely want to try out this delicious and easy-to-make Old Fashioned Ham Salad recipe. Not only is making an easy sandwich a great way to use up leftover ham, but it’s also healthy and packed with flavor, much like our tuna salad recipe and egg salad sandwiches that you love!

Whether you’re looking for a quick lunch, a potluck dish, or an appetizer to bring to a party, this jam-packed ham salad is sure to satisfy your taste buds.

Old fashioned ham salad on bun, sitting next to chips and pickles, all on white plate.

Looking for ideas to use up the ham and cheese? Try these Hot Ham and Cheese Sandwiches or grab some rolls and make some Italian Sliders with Hawaiian Rolls. You can also check out this collection of Salad Recipes if this dish gets you in the mood for more salad experiments.

Prefer more lettuce in your salad? Chop up a Grinder Salad, which includes ham and all the best sub sandwich toppings but without the bread.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It uses a few ingredients: With only 6 ingredients, this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand.
  • Make-ahead recipe: This recipe actually works best when it sits in the refrigerator for an hour or so which makes it a great recipe to prepare early
  • Ready in only 15 minutes: This recipe, from start to finish, only takes a quarter of an hour. So it is great to make it when you don’t have a lot of time.

What is Ham Salad?

Ham salad is a classic dish made from chopped pieces of ham, mixed with a variety of seasonings and vegetables, such as celery, onion, and mayo. It’s a simple and easy way to use up leftover ham from a holiday or a Sunday dinner, and it’s a popular option for picnics, potlucks, and sandwiches.

The origins of ham salad are unknown, but it has been a staple dish in American cuisine for many years. You can find ham salad recipes in cookbooks dating as far back as the 1900s, and it remains a beloved comfort food to this day.

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for ham salad on white counter.
  • Mayonnaise – We used ¾ a cup of mayo in this salad recipe but you can add more or less depending on your tastes.
  • Dijon mustard – If you aren’t sure about the flavor of mustard, you can always reduce the amount a little. But it definitely adds something so it is worth keeping in the mix.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Celery – if you don’t like celery, you could add carrots or green peppers to give a bit of crunch to the recipe. We love celery in our sandwich recipes, like this chicken salad sandwich recipe and it adds that perfect crunch.
  • Sweet pickle relish – you can use dill pickle relish, chopped capers or some chopped green olives as a substitute for this.
  • Dijon mustard – yellow mustard has a similar flavor, while whole grain mustard is a bit less tangy. Honey mustard is the sweeter version and works really well with the saltiness of the ham.

How to Make Old Fashioned Ham Salad

This Old Fashioned Ham Salad is broken into 3 components:

  • Prepare the salad ingredients
  • Make the mustard mayonnaise
  • Combine the ingredients

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-4 for making old fashioned ham salad.

STEP 1. Prepare the salad ingredients. Add chopped ham to the bowl of the food processor. Pulse several times. Add chopped celery and onion to the food processor and pulse until desired consistency is met. Be careful not to over-mix. (Image 1).

Tip: If you don’t have a food processor, you can use a sharp knife to chop the meat and vegetables for the first step.

Steps 5-8 for making old fashioned ham salad.

STEP 2. Make the mustard mayonnaise. In a small mixing bowl, combine mayonnaise, relish, and Dijon mustard. Mix to combine. (Image 2).

STEP 3. Combine the ingredients. In a large mixing bowl combine ham and mayonnaise mixtures and stir to combine. Add salt and pepper to taste. (Image 3).

STEP 4. Serve with bread, crackers or sliced celery sticks. (Image 4).

Old fashioned ham salad in mixing bowl.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Let the salad sit for a bit. You can serve the dish as soon as you have made it, but it definitely benefits from sitting in the refrigerator for an hour or so. This enhances the flavors and is definitely worth waiting for.
  • Use leftover ham. You can use fresh ham for the recipe, but it is a great way to use leftover ham from another recipe and cut down on food waste. Then, if you still have leftover ham, you’ll also love this ham casserole that uses a lot more!
Old fashioned ham salad sandwiches on wooden cutting board.

Recipe FAQs

Why does my ham salad get watery?

If you’ve noticed that your ham salad has become watery, there are a few potential causes. If you’ve added too much mayonnaise or other wet ingredients, this can also contribute to a watery consistency. To avoid this issue, ensure your ingredients are fresh and add enough mayonnaise to bind the ingredients together without overdoing it.
You can also try draining any excess liquid from the chopped vegetables before mixing them into the ham salad, to reduce moisture content and prevent your ham salad from becoming too watery.

What is the difference between deviled ham and ham salad?

Both deviled ham and ham salad are tasty dishes made from chopped ham, but they differ in their texture and flavor. Deviled ham is smoother and creamier in texture, with a slightly spicier flavor due to the addition of mustard and Worcestershire sauce. Ham salad typically contains chunks of ham and vegetables, such as celery and onion, with mayonnaise, relish, and other seasonings for a sweet and savory flavor.

What to Serve with Ham Salad

This delicious old-fashioned ham salad goes well with a variety of side dishes. Here are a few great options:

  • Potato salad: This classic side dish offers a nice contrast to the salty and savory flavor of ham salad. This Amish potato salad recipe is a great classic!
  • Fresh fruit salad: A side of fresh fruit, such as grapes or sliced apples, is a refreshing and healthy option that complements the flavors of the ham salad.
  • Cole Slaw: This tangy and crunchy side dish pairs well with ham salad and adds a nice textural contrast.
  • Pasta salad: A cold pasta salad with colorful vegetables and a light dressing is a great side dish that won’t overpower the flavors of the ham salad. See all of our easy pasta salads for recipe ideas!
  • Veggies: Vegetables, such as these candied carrots, oven roasted broccoli, or roasted Brussels sprouts, are a healthy and flavorful side dish that complements the rich and savory flavors of the ham salad.

Storage

Ham salad can be stored in the refrigerator for up to 3 to 5 days. However, it’s important to keep the ham salad in an airtight container to prevent it from drying out and to reduce the risk of contamination.

For best results, try to eat your ham salad within the first few days, as the ingredients may start to break down over time, affecting the flavor and texture.

More Salad Recipes You’ll Love

Want to add a few more salads to your menu plan? You could try this Italian Chopped Salad with pasta and delicious blue cheese. Or try an Asian Chopped Salad that combines sweet and savory ingredients in the best way. Or check out one of these 20+ of the Best Make-Ahead Salads when you are a bit short on time!

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Old fashioned ham salad on white bun, next to pickles and potato chips
Print Pin
4.93 from 14 votes

Ham Salad Recipe

This ham salad recipe is delicious as an appetizer served with crackers or for lunch or dinner served with chips, a side salad or soup. This dish is a definite crowd pleaser at showers, birthday parties and family gatherings served in finger sandwich rolls.
Course Appetizer, Dinner, Lunch
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 6 sandwiches
Calories 389kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 pound ham roughly chopped
  • 1 rib celery roughly chopped
  • 1 small onion roughly chopped
  • ¾ cup mayonnaise
  • 2 tablespoons sweet pickle relish
  • 2 tablespoons Dijon mustard
  • salt and pepper to taste

Instructions

  • Add chopped ham to the bowl of food processor.  Pulse several times.  Add chopped celery and onion to the food processor and pulse until desired consistency is met.  Be careful not to over mix.
  • In a small mixing bowl combine mayonnaise, relish, Dijon mustard. Mix to combine
  • To a large mixing bowl combine ham and mayonnaise mixtures and stir to combine. Add salt and pepper to taste
  • Serve with bread, crackers or sliced celery sticks.

Notes

Recipe Tips:
  • This dish can be served once prepared, however, allowing it to sit in the refrigerator for up to an hour will enhance the flavors
  • If you do not have access to a food processor you can use a knife to chop the meat and vegetables.
  • Leftovers can be stored in refrigerator for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Serving: 1sandwich | Calories: 389kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 34g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 14g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 59mg | Sodium: 1177mg | Potassium: 265mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 113IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 1mg

Oven Baked Bacon Wrapped Chicken Thighs

This bacon wrapped chicken thighs recipe is a simple weeknight meal. Tender chicken thighs paired with the delicious flavor of bacon create the perfect dinner in less than one hour. Add your favorite side dishes, and you’re set.

Bacon wrapped chicken thighs on a white plate

The reason that chicken is so popular is because it’s so versatile to make. From Chicken Street Tacos to Baked Chicken Cutlets, chicken can literally take on any flavor and taste.

But when it comes to boneless chicken thighs specifically, we also love this chicken thighs and gravy recipe!

⭐️ Why This Recipe Works

  • It’s quick! You only need about 40 minutes from start to finish to make this easy meal.
  • Ingredients: Minimal ingredients create maximum flavor!
  • Great for leftovers: If you’re lucky enough to have leftovers, this chicken recipe heats up perfectly the next day.

🧾 Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients are common.

Ingredients list for making chicken wrapped in bacon
  • Chicken thighs – If you’re not familiar with using chicken thighs, you may be surprised to hear that thighs can be extremely flavorful and juicy compared to chicken breasts. We love using thighs in recipes, such as these Instant Pot Chicken Thighs, because they turn out so juicy and sometimes, are more affordable than breasts.
  • Brown sugar – You can also use coconut sugar if you’re looking for a paleo recipe.
  • Bacon – Thin bacon is really the best option for this recipe. Thicker bacon can cook for the full 30 minutes and still be soggy. You want the timing for the bacon and chicken to work out perfectly so that they are both done at the same time, so thin is the way to go. If you like extra crispy bacon, you can pan-sear the bacon for several minutes (you do not want to cook it fully just help the process along)right before wrapping the chicken thighs(allowing the bacon to cool before handling).
  • Dijon mustard – this adds flavor and helps the seasoning adhere to the chicken; however, avoid adding too much so that the bacon does not become crisp. There is no need to add mustard to the side of the chicken that will be folded to be on the inside when cooking.

📖 Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or because you prefer to change things up. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Chicken breasts – Chicken breasts can be used instead of thighs, however, they can vary significantly in size so you may need to wrap the breast with several slices of bacon ensuring that the bacon does not overlap. Chicken breasts will cook quicker if the chicken breasts are small (about the same size as thighs).
    Because of the variation in cook time, be sure to use a meat thermometer to ensure the chicken reaches an internal temperature of 165 F. Avoid overcooking because chicken breasts are leaner, they can become dry if overcooked.
  • Use regular mustard – If you don’t have Dijon mustard, you can use regular mustard in its place.
  • Use seasoned bacon – Maple bacon would be really good with this dish!

🍳 Equipment

  • tinfoil
  • wire baking rack
  • mixing bowl

👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make Bacon Wrapped Boneless Chicken Thighs

You’ll start by preheating the oven to 400 degrees.

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Mixing the ingredients in a bowl

STEP 1: Prepare a baking sheet. Add tinfoil to the baking sheet and then place a wired baking rack on top of the foil.

STEP 2: Mix the seasonings. In a bowl, mix the kosher salt, coconut sugar, black pepper, paprika, garlic powder, and ground mustard. Stir so everything is combined well.

Covering the chicken with seasonings

STEP 3: Prepare the chicken. Pat the chicken thighs with a clean paper towel and then place them on a plate with the exterior surface of the thighs facing up. Coat the exterior surface with mustard, and then sprinkle the spice rub mixture on top of the mustard.

Adding the seasoning to the top of the chicken

STEP 4: Fold the chicken. Once the thighs are seasoned, fold them in half so that the seasoned thighs are the only part exposed. Wrap each thigh with a piece of bacon, but don’t overlap the bacon.

TIP: Toothpicks can be used to secure the bacon, but I found them to be more of a hassle than helpful.

Put the thighs on the wire baking rack, keeping the chicken as flat as possible. Repeat with all the thighs, and leave 2 inches in between.

Wrap the bacon around the chicken

STEP 5: Cook. Place the thighs in the oven and bake for 25-30 minutes. The bacon should be crisp, and the internal temperature of the chicken should be 165 degrees. Remove and serve.

Close up of chicken thighs perfectly cooked

💭 Recipe Pro Tips

  • Don’t overlap the bacon. If you overlap the bacon, it won’t crisp up. Make sure that you wrap it in a single layer on the chicken thighs.
White plate full of cooked chicken wrapped in bacon

❄️ How to Store and Reheat

  • Storage: Store these chicken thighs in an airtight container in the fridge and consume within 3-4 days of cooking. (Keep in mind the “sell by” or “use by” date on the chicken.)
  • Reheat: Since this recipe has bacon in it, it is best to reheat it in the air fryer or oven. Microwaving works too if you don’t mind soft bacon. To reheat, place the chicken in the oven or air fryer at 400 F and cook for 5-10 minutes or until the chicken is warm and the bacon is crispy. When reheating, note that the bacon can burn at this temperature if cooked for too long.
Chicken thighs with a piece cut out, paired with a side of broccoli

📋 Recipe FAQs

How long does it take to cook chicken wrapped in bacon in the oven?

Chicken thighs and bacon is a fast and easy recipe! The cook time for this recipe varies between 25-30 minutes.

Why are my baked chicken thighs tough?

Chicken will turn tough if it’s overcooked. For the best cooked chicken bacon thighs, using a meat thermometer is the best bet.

Insert the probe of the meat thermometer into the thickest part of the chicken. As long as the reading is 165 degrees, the chicken should be moist, tender, and delicious.

Can you put cooked bacon on raw chicken?

You can! If you want to have bacon that is extra crispy, sear it for a few minutes before wrapping it around the chicken.

What to serve with bacon wrapped chicken?

The fun part about making bacon wrapped chicken thighs in the oven is that they pair with just about anything. Steamed broccoli, side salads, or even homemade macaroni and cheese.

How do I know when chicken is fully cooked?

Bacon chicken thighs are delicious when they’re cooked perfectly, and this is where a meat thermometer comes into play. The internal temperature needs to be 165 degrees for chicken to be fully cooked and safe to eat.

Can I make this recipe in an air fryer?

Absolutely! This recipe can be done in an air fryer and you won’t need to alter the recipe much, in order to use this cooking method. Cook the chicken at 400 F in the air fryer for 25-30 minutes, ensuring there is adequate space between the chicken thighs. If you are using a small air fryer or an air fryer that uses a basket, you may need to work in batches.
Still, consider using some type of rack to help the bacon become crisp, and line the tray below with tinfoil to make clean-up easier.

🥗 What to Serve with Chicken Thighs

This bacon-wrapped chicken pairs amazing with a green salad recipe and this focaccia bread recipe. Or, you can also dip it in this jalapeno ranch dressing for an added kick!

🍗 More Delicious Chicken Recipes

If you love this easy chicken dinner as much as we do, here are other chicken recipes we think you’ll love:

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Bacon wrapped chicken thighs on white plate.
Print Pin
4.38 from 8 votes

Bacon Wrapped Chicken Thighs in the Oven

This bacon wrapped chicken thighs recipe is a simple weeknight dinner! So fast and easy to make in the oven.
Course Main Course
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 244kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds boneless skinless chicken thighs
  • 8 slices bacon thin cut
  • 2 tablespoons Dijon mustard
  • 2 tablespoons brown sugar
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon ground mustard seed

Instructions

  • Prep: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees. Add tinfoil to the baking sheet and then place a wired baking rack on top of the foil.
  • Spices: In a bowl, mix the kosher salt, brown sugar, black pepper, paprika, garlic powder, and ground mustard. Stir so everything is combined well.
  • Prep chicken: Pat the chicken thighs with a clean paper towel and then place them on a plate with the exterior surface of the thighs facing up. Coat the exterior surface with mustard, and then sprinkle the spice rub mixture on top of the mustard.
  • Coat chicken: Once the thighs are seasoned, fold them in half so that the seasoned thighs are the only part exposed. Wrap each thigh with a piece of bacon, but don't overlap the bacon. Put the thighs on the wire baking rack, keeping the chicken as flat as possible. Repeat with all the thighs, and leave 2 inches in between.
  • Bake: Place the thighs in the oven and bake for 25-30 minutes. The bacon should be crisp, and the internal temperature of the chicken should be 165 degrees. Remove and serve.

Notes

Tips:
Don’t overlap the bacon. Overlapping the bacon will prevent the bacon from turning crispy.
Storage: 
Store in airtight container in the fridge and consume within 3-4 days of cooking. 
 

Nutrition

Serving: 1thigh | Calories: 244kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.05g | Cholesterol: 122mg | Sodium: 580mg | Potassium: 343mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 101IU | Vitamin C: 0.04mg | Calcium: 19mg | Iron: 1mg

Summer Dinner Ideas

Recipes for summer dinner ideas, when you come in late on those summer nights and need something quick and easy to feed your family.

Since it’s summertime, you will also love these food ideas for a romantic picnic and these summer snack ideas! Or, if it’s too hot outside, an indoor picnic may be a better idea, and you can serve these summer dinner ideas on a blanket, in your floor!

Easy summer dinner recipe collage with text overlay.

I always keep summer meals and dinner recipe ideas handy for those warm nights when I want to:

  • Avoid heating up the oven – at least for hours.
  • Make something QUICK and easy.
  • Make something light, instead of heavy.

Summer Dinner Ideas

Here is a collection of my favorite summer dinner recipes ALL in one place, so when you need something quick and easy, it will all be right here! But before you dive in, remember that I have a great collection of pasta salads that can be a great, easy, light dinner option in the summer too.

grilled marinated shrimp

Grilled Marinated Shrimp

This marinated shrimp recipe is so tasty. Grill these and serve them with tacos, or on a salad for a light summer dinner. Or, if you’re a fan of fried shrimp, it’s one of the most popular recipes here!

Italian Sliders

These sandwiches might be small in size, but they have such a delicious, big flavor! Serve them with chips or summer corn on the cob for a simple meal everyone will enjoy.

Pasta with Corn and Tomatoes   

Fettuccine with corn and tomatoes makes for a simple summer meal that has so many fresh flavors in the mix. Make this on a hot night when you want a light meatless meal. You could also serve these mozzarella wraps with this pasta as a side dish or use any leftover ingredients to make them the next night.

Panko Crusted Cod

Cod is a great meal no matter how you serve it. This recipe uses panko crumbs for a crunchy crust that is unbeatable.

Smoked Cornish Hens

Smoked Cornish game hens make for such a nice summer meal. They are small in size but have such a delectable smoky flavor!

Air Fryer Turkey Burgers

Air Fryer Turkey Burgers 

Make juicy turkey burgers in your air fryer for a fast family dinner. You can pile these high with summer veggies for a complete meal, or serve them with some really yummy air fryer eggplant fries.

Baked hot dogs on hot dog buns, sitting on white plate.

Hot Dogs in the Oven

I know heating up the oven isn’t ideal in the summer but you’ll only need to cook these hot dogs for 10 minutes so it shouldn’t heat up the house too much. Baking hot dogs in the oven is a great way to cook them when you need a large amount for a summer party too!

Instant pot orange chicken in a white bowl with broccoli and rice

Instant Pot Orange Chicken

No need to stop for take out on the way home. This orange chicken cooks in a flash in the instant pot for a great dinner.

Burger on a bun with red onion, pickles and cheese

Stove Top Burgers

If you are too tired to fuss with the grill tonight, this recipe for stove-top burgers is just what you need. These flavorful and juicy burgers are sure to be a family favorite. Or, kick things up a notch and make these cowboy burgers, with all the fun toppings.

side salad with cheese and dressing on a white plate

The Best Side Salad 

Summer is the perfect time to make a great salad and make a meal of it. With garden fresh veggies and your favorite dressing there is a lot to like about this salad. You can even add a quick protein to this salad to make it main dish.

Chicken Macaroni Salad

This is not your mama’s macaroni salad! It has chicken mixed in for a dish you can dig into for an easy summer meal.

Pinwheel sandwiches stacked on top of one another, on cutting board.

Pinwheel Sandwiches 

These pinwheels have so much fun all wrapped up in a couple of bites! They’re a meal that is cool, delicious, and super simple on a hot summer night.

Salmon patties, stacked on top of one another on a bed of lettuce.

Old-Fashioned Salmon Patties

Salmon patties are fried to a golden-brown color, yet still light enough for a summer dinner, that won’t weigh you down. Similarly, these crab cake sandwiches are also a great summer dinner idea. Have an air fryer? Try these Air Fryer Salmon Patties too!

Hot ham and cheese sandwich with pasta salad

Hot Ham and Cheese

You can’t go wrong with a classic like ham and cheese. Pop these in the oven, or toss them on the grill for an easy summer dinner that never goes out of style.

Blue Cheese burger on pretzel bun, sitting on square plate with french fries.

Blue Cheese Burgers

Love this spin on a traditional cheeseburger recipe. If you love blue cheese, then you’ll love how the crumbles are built right in to your burger! Or for a really fun spin on burgers, that are perfect for summer flavors, these Aloha Burgers are a hit!

Maid Rite sandwich sitting on white plate, next to cooked french fries.

Maid-Rite Sandwiches

This old recipe is sometimes called a “loose meat sandwich” and is similar to a traditional sloppy joe, and has been around for ages. It’s a great, easy way, to make a sandwich in the summertime.

Grilled pork chops

Sweet and Smoky Grilled Pork Chops

These pork chops are sweet and smoky and grill fast! You only need a few minutes per side to get a great dinner on the table.

Salsa, cheese and beef burritos

Cheesy Salsa Burritos

With some simple ingredients like beef, beans, salsa, and cheese you can wrap up a great family-friendly meal. Who could resist these burritos? You can make them ahead of time and freeze them for those nights you need a hand with dinner. Love Mexican food in the summertime too? These chicken fajitas wraps and steak quesadillas are great to put on the dinner rotation.

Ham and cheese sliders stacked on top of one another.

Ham and Cheese Sliders

Sometimes called, “funeral sandwiches” these sliders aren’t just for funerals or parties! Sliders are a great summer dinner idea to keep things easy and bite-size! Spice things up a bit and also give these buffalo chicken sliders a try!

Vegan noodle bowls with broccoli and sesame seeds

Vegan Noodle Bowls

Noodle bowls are always a good idea! This recipe is packed with veggies for a gluten free vegan meal option.

Parmesan crusted chicken tenders

Parmesan Crusted Chicken Tenders

These tenders are low carb and so tasty. Make these for a guilt-free dinner that the entire family will love. Or if you have a smoker, these smoked chicken tenders are easy to make and so full of flavor.

sloppy joe meat on slider buns with cheese

Sloppy Joe Sliders

Sloppy joe sliders are small in size but have all of the bold flavors of Sloppy Joes! Pile these high with saucy meat and cheese for a dinner the kids will LOVE. (They’ll also love these chicken bacon ranch sliders too!)

French fries baked on baking sheet with cheese, pepperoni and pizza sauce.

Pizza Fries

Who doesn’t love pizza and fries? Combine the two and you have an amazing easy dinner idea! Watch these disappear quickly! Love having pizza in different forms? These pizza sliders are amazing too, and you can use leftover ingredients to make these the next night.

Texas toast pizza with cheese and pepperoni

Texas Toast Pizza

If you ever have one of those nights that you just aren’t sure what to serve for dinner, you can’t go wrong with Texas toast pizzas! These are tasty and so easy to make after a day of summer fun. Now, not as quick as these Texas Toast pizzas… but this school pizza recipe will make the kids love summertime even more.

Close up of grinder salad in white bowl with serving serving utensils.

Grinder Salad

If you love the grinder sandwiches, making them in salad-form is such a great, light dinner idea for those warm days.

Air fryer brats on a white plate with buns

Air Fryer Brats

Too hot outside to stand over the grill? No sweat, you can make the best brats in your air fryer while you soak up some AC on a hot day. Or, make stove-top brats to keep the heat down in the house too!

Air Fryer Breaded shrimp on a plate with lemon and cocktail sauce

Air Fryer Shrimp

This shrimp recipe is so easy when you use your air fryer. These are crunchy and pair perfectly with cocktail sauce. Have more shrimp on hand? This Boom Boom Shrimp recipe is out of this world!

BBQ chicken pasta on a white plate

BBQ Chicken Pasta

Get bbq chicken flavor without having to host a cookout. This recipe makes for such a tasty pasta that captures the flavor of summer perfectly. I know pasta can seem heavy in the summer but recipes like this creamy lemon pasta too, are light enough and won’t weigh you down in the heat.

Fried chicken sliders with lettuce and pickles

Fried Chicken Sliders

Sliders are awesome for summer meals. They aren’t too big or heavy for a hot day, but they bring so much flavor to the table. These roast beef sliders are also a fun recipe to make for an easy dinner!

Tuna salad sandwich with crackers on plate

Tuna Salad Sandwich – The BEST!

I know a tuna salad sandwich isn’t anything new but wait until you try this one! There’s something about the flavors that come together in this recipe, that has everyone leaving 5-star reviews!

Cold crab salad

Crab Salad 

This recipe for crab salad is great on lettuce, or your favorite bread. It is so tasty you might want to just eat it as it is for a cool summer meal.

Close up of taco salad with Catalina dressing on a fork.

Dorito Taco Salad

Have you ever had a taco salad with Catalina dressing in it? I’m telling you what, this recipe is packed with flavor and has become my husband’s new favorite dish.

Cream cheese pasta swirled on a fork

Cream Cheese Pasta

If you have 20 minutes you can make this creamy pasta for a comforting meal. You only need 7 ingredients to recreate this simple dish that gets rave reviews every time.

Fried tacos on a wooden cutting board.

Fried Tacos

As if tacos could get any better… oh wait, they can! If you haven’t tried making fried tacos yet, this is your sign to make them! Or, even though slow cooker recipes in the summer aren’t that popular, I think it’s a great way to make and enjoy shredded beef tacos, so you’re not hovering over the stove!

Cheeseburger sub on white plate, next to potato chips.

Cheeseburger Subs

Everyone loves a good cheeseburger, so why not mix them up from time to time, and serve them differently? We love our burgers in the oven but it’s so fun to whip up these cheeseburger subs too!

Chicken Bolognese

This bolognese uses chicken for a tasty twist that is healthy and delicious. Pair this with a salad for an easy summer dinner you can have ready in 30 minutes.

Meatball Stuffed Peppers in a skillet

Meatball Stuffed Peppers

This stuffed pepper recipe is so good! Use garden fresh peppers and frozen meatballs to make an easy and tasty dinner that is perfect for a busy summer night. 

Shrimp baked potatoes

Shrimp Baked Potatoes

Bring two favorites for dinner together into one amazing stuffed potato. This recipe has a creamy cajun sauce that compliments both the shrimp and the baked potato, making it a perfect summer supper.

Asian chicken lettuce wraps

Asian Chicken Wraps

These leafy lettuce wraps are so yummy. You are going to love this bold Asian flavor in a healthy wrap that makes a healthy meal. Then, if you’re a fan of using chicken for an easy dinner, it doesn’t get much easier than these salt and pepper chicken bites!

Chicken street tacos on white platter.

Chicken Street Tacos 

This recipe brings street taco flavor to your kitchen. You won’t need to chase down your favorite food truck to get a great and easy meal on the table tonight!

BBQ Meat over queso chips

BBQ White Queso Nachos

Clean out your freezer and make an awesome meal in the process with this easy dish. It uses all of the best flavors like cheese, bbq, and whatever meat you have on hand.

Asian chopped salad with mandarin oranges

Asian Chopped Salad

Chopped salad makes for such a good summer meal. Use prepackaged coleslaw mix and whip up a delectable homemade dressing to change up your salad game from the standard lettuce and tomato option.

Chicken bacon ranch sandwiches on wooden cutting board.

Chicken Bacon Ranch Sandwiches

Why are the ingredients, chicken, bacon, and ranch, together, so delicious? The creaminess of these flavors on a bun, will knock your socks off!

Chicken grilled cheese sandwich

Grilled Chicken Cheese

Tuck juicy chicken into a grilled cheese for a delicious, protein-packed summer meal. You can pair this with a salad, or some fresh veggies and dip for easy eating.

Crock pot shredded chicken breasts

Slow Cooker Shredded Chicken

This shredded chicken cooks low and slow while you are at work for such a good dinner. Make sandwiches or tacos with this, or toss some shredded chicken into a great side salad for a healthy summer meal.

Pretzel slider buns with chicken salad to make sandwiches.

Chicken Salad Recipe

If you love ordering chicken salad at your favorite cafe, you’ll likely get chicken salad similar to this one, which has grapes, apples, and pecans in it, giving it that amazing creaminess and crunchy textures. Or, for a fun twist, you can make this curry chicken salad too! Love cold salad sandwiches? This egg salad recipe is easy to make and great to keep in the refrigerator for easy dinners.

Turkey sliders stacked on cutting board.

Turkey and Cheese Sliders

Although we do pop these in the oven, I feel like they are a great, light, summertime dinner option. Or, you can make other fun slider recipes like these salmon sliders and fish sliders.

Air Fryer Tilapia with lemons on a white plate

Air Fryer Tilapia

Tilapia makes for such a healthy and light meal. Make this on a hot summer night, and let your air fryer for the cooking while you unwind after work.

Sliced French bread pizza slices on wooden cutting board with meat and vegetable toppings.

French Bread Pizza

This unique pizza recipe uses French bread as the crust, and this recipe is made to keep a crispy, not a soggy, crust.

Stacked wedges of peanut butter and jelly sandwiches.

Peanut Butter and Jelly Sandwiches

I wanted to wrap up this amazing list of dinner ideas with a classic that we can sometimes forget about. Yes, I know you probably know how to make a PB&J but did you know that there are ways that you can make it even better? It’s true! Or, you can also make a fried peanut butter and jelly to take the classic to a new level.

More Dinner Ideas

If you love easy dinner ideas, you’ll want to make sure you check out some of our most popular dinner ideas here:

We love gathering recipes for you, depending on cuisine, ingredients, holiday, or season! See all of our amazing recipe collections!

7UP Cake

7UP cake is not only easy to make but with its citrus flavor, it makes it one of the best cake recipes for summer. It uses simple ingredients, and is ready in a little over an hour, making it a quick dessert recipe whether it’s for serving guests or simply enjoying after dinner on the weekends.

Recipe originally published February 2019, updated April 2023.

Sliced 7Up Cake on cake stand.

Hey Fantabulosity readers! Meg here from Meg’s Everyday Indulgence, bringing you this delicious 7Up Pound Cake. Knowing that you all love easy dessert recipes and like the easy pound cake recipe here on Fantabulosity, I knew this cake recipe would fit right in with your favorites to serve after one of our favorite spring dinner recipe ideas!

🍰 Why You’ll Love This Cake Recipe

  • Lemon Flavor: Lemon is at the top of the list when I think of Spring flavors so I’m super excited to be sharing this simple, zingy cake with you today. Similar to Jessica’s creamy lemon bundt cake, this one uses 7up to add some extra fun citrus flavor! The first hint of citrus flavor in the 7Up Pound Cake comes from the 7Up. The lemon-lime flavor of the soda bakes up in the cake with a slight lemon flavor.
  • Simple Recipe: Let’s start off by talking about just how simple it is to whip up this cake. You only need 6 ingredients. And it’s completely from scratch. Butter, sugar, egg, flour, 7Up, and lemon zest. That’s it!
  • Not Overpowering Lemon: The zest of a lemon is also mixed into the batter to really amp up the lemon flavor throughout the cake. There isn’t an overpowering lemon flavor to the cake but it definitely has a citrusy background.
  • Cake Texture: The 7Up in the cake lends a slight effervescence and lightens up the texture a bit so that it’s not as dense as a traditional pound cake. This cake has a moist and tender crumb that is the perfect mix in texture between a traditional cake and a pound cake.

If you love lemon too, you’ll also love this lemon puppy chow and these lemon cake mix brownies.

🧾 Ingredients for 7UP Cake

Make sure to scroll to the bottom of the post if you’re looking for the recipe card with ingredient measurements and directions for this traditional egg custard!

The ingredients for this recipe are simple, and can be found at most grocery stores.

Labeled ingredients for 7up cake.

🥤 How to Make 7UP Cake

Preheat oven to 350 degrees F. Heavily grease then flour a bundt pan. Set aside. 

Steps 1-4 for 7up cake.

Step 1. In the bowl of a stand mixture, cream the butter.

Step 2. Add the sugar and beat until light and fluffy, 1 to 2 minutes. 

Steps 3 & 4. Add eggs, incorporating after each addition, until well combined.

Cream the flour and lemon and 7up in the cake batter. Steps 5-8.

Steps 5 & 6. Add flour and mix until just incorporated. 

Steps 7 & 8. Add 7UP and lemon zest and turn on low. Slowly incorporate until the batter just comes together.

Pro Tip: You could also add in the zest of a lime to infuse even more citrus goodness into this cake.

Steps 9-10, showing baking the 7up cake.

💡 Expert Tip

For this cake, and all cakes baked in a bundt pan, it’s very important to grease and flour the pan properly to keep it from sticking and breaking. There’s not much worse in the baking realm than trying to release a cake after the work of mixing it up and baking just to find it completely stuck.

Step 9. Pour into the prepared bundt ban and smooth out the top.

Step 10. Bake for an hour to 1 hour and 10 minutes.

Baked 7UP cake, cooling on wire rack.

Step 11. Remove from oven and place on wire cooling rack for 10 minutes. Invert the bundt pan and allow it to fully cool. Slice into 12 to 16 pieces and serve.

Slice of 7up cake on white plate, topped with whipped cream, and sitting next to strawberry and 7up can.

🍋 Lemon Glaze for 7UP Cake

If you choose to top this 7UP cake with a glaze, we prefer using:

  • 2 cups powdered sugar
  • 1-2 Tablespoons milk
  • 1 Tablespoon lemon juice
  • lemon zest, optional

NOTE: Allow cake to fully cool before topping with this glaze, or glaze will soak in to warm cake.

  1. In a bowl, mix powdered sugar, lemon juice, and zest.
  2. Next, pour in milk until it reaches the thickness you want for your cake.
  3. Drizzle lemon glaze over cake, and serve.

❄️ Storage

Without glaze: If making the 7UP cake without the glaze, this cake can sit, stored on the counter at room temperature. (It’s best to put in an airtight container to retain freshness.)

With glaze: Is using glaze, refrigerating the cake is best, since milk will be used.

🍓 What to Serve with 7UP Cake

You can enjoy it deliciously on its own, with the glaze above, or you can fancy it up in a few ways. Here are some of our favorite suggestions:

  • powdered sugar
  • strawberries or other fresh berries
  • whipped cream

🧁 Similar Dessert Recipes

If you love dessert recipes like this one, we think you’re also going to love these reader favorites:

Recipe

Slice of 7up cake on white plate, sitting next to a can of 7up.
Print Pin
4.50 from 16 votes

7UP Cake

This simple 7UP Cake Recipe: this easy 6 ingredient cake from scratch is dense in texture with a bright, citrusy flavor by using 7UP and lemon!
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 25 minutes
Servings 12 servings
Calories 549kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 ½ cups unsalted butter, room temperature
  • 3 cups granulated sugar
  • 5 large eggs, room temperature
  • 3 cups all-purpose flour
  • ⅔ cup 7Up
  • zest of 1 lemon

Optional Glaze Ingredients (Not Pictured)

  • 2 cups powdered sugar
  • 1 Tablespoon milk
  • 1 Tablespoon lemon juice
  • lemon zest optional

Instructions

  • Prep: Preheat oven to 350 degrees F. Heavily grease and flour a bundt pan. Set aside. 
  • Cream Butter and Sugar: In the bowl of a stand mixture, cream the butter. Add the sugar and beat until light and fluffy, 1 to 2 minutes. 
  • Eggs & Flour: Add eggs, incorporating after each addition, until well combined. Add flour and mix until just incorporated. 
  • Add Soda & Zest: Add 7Up and lemon zest and turn on low. Slowly incorporate until the batter just comes together.
  • Pour: Pour into the prepared bundt ban and smooth out the top.
  • Bake Cake: Bake for an hour to 1 hour and 15 minutes or until a toothpick inserted in to the center comes out clean.
    Remove from oven and place on wire cooling rack for 10 minutes. Invert bundt pan and allow to fully cool. Slice into 12 to 16 pieces and serve.

Optional Lemon Glaze (Not Pictured)

  • In a bowl, mix powdered sugar, lemon juice, and zest.
  • Next, pour in milk until it reaches the thickness you want for your cake.
  • Drizzle lemon glaze over cake, and serve.

Notes

Important Note About Greasing Your Pan: For this cake, and all cakes baked in a bundt pan, it’s very important to grease and flour the pan properly to keep it from sticking and breaking. There’s not much worse in the baking realm than trying to release a cake after the work of mixing it up and baking just to find it completely stuck.

Nutrition

Serving: 1slice | Calories: 549kcal | Carbohydrates: 75g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 148mg | Sodium: 39mg | Potassium: 72mg | Sugar: 51g | Vitamin A: 835IU | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1.9mg

Chicken Street Tacos

Chicken Street Tacos: A delicious and easy taco recipe, that’s fun to serve on taco night! With only a 30-minute to an hour, marinate time, these delicious and flavorful tacos are a great easy dinner idea.

Mexican food, especially those made with chicken, are some of our favorites! We think you’re also going to love this chicken fajitas wrap recipe!

Chicken street tacos on white plate.

It is NO secret around here that tacos and taco bars and taco recipes are a favorite of ours. We think you’re going to love these, especially if you’ve loved these baked chicken tacos, since they’re similar and a favorite!

Hey there! Meg here from Meg’s Everyday Indulgence with another delicious recipe to share. These street tacos are customizable, simple to make, and sure to become a dinner staple. You could even serve them at a fiesta party, for a fun party dish.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients Needed

The ingredients needed for this chicken street tacos recipe are basic and can be found at most grocery stores!

Labeled ingredients for chicken street tacos
  • Boneless skinless chicken breasts – you could make a large batch of chicken in the slow cooker, after marinating it for this recipe if that’s helpful! You can also use boiled chicken thighs if desired.
  • Taco seasoning – We love this chicken taco seasoning recipe.
  • Small corn or flour tortillas – you can choose which type you prefer, however, we prefer corn tortillas for this recipe.
  • Pico – We love making this easy Pico de gallo recipe to serve on top of these tacos.
  • Queso Fresco – Queso fresco is that crumbly, slightly salty white cheese you see on authentic street tacos. It’s creamy, yet crumbly and adds the perfect touch to these tacos. If you’re unable to find it, you can substitute a Mexican blend of shredded cheese or pepper jack.

Tip for Marinating Chicken

Fast Marinating: Thinly sliced chicken is key to making this recipe quickly. You can either buy chicken cutlets or cut your chicken breasts. Boneless chicken thighs would also be great in this recipe since they tend to be juicy!

Slicing the Chicken: Grab 2 boneless skinless chicken breasts and cut each one widthwise so that you end up with two thin pieces of chicken per breast.

How to Make Chicken Street Tacos

Steps 1-4 of chicken street tacos recipe.

Cutting the chicken: Filet the chicken so that you have 4 thinly sliced pieces of chicken.

Marinate: In a bowl, whisk together 2 tablespoons olive oil, taco seasoning, and juice of lime. Add chicken and toss to coat. Marinate for 30 minutes to an hour.

Steps 5-8 for how to make chicken street tacos.

Cook chicken: Heat a large cast iron skillet over medium heat. Add remaining tablespoon of olive oil to the hot skillet. Add chicken and cook for 2 to 3 minutes per side, until juices run clear. Remove to a cutting board and let rest for 5 minutes. Dice into small pieces.

Tips for Heating Tortillas:

  • First, choose what kind of tortillas you want to use.
  • You can either wrap them in a damp paper towel and microwave for 30 seconds or wrap them in foil and place in your oven at around 200 degrees while you’re preparing the chicken.
  • Keep them wrapped until right when you’re serving dinner. This will keep them warm and soft. You can even buy those tortilla warmers they use in restaurants to keep them warm if you wish.
  • You can also char corn tortillas over the grill or your gas stove. Hold them over the flame (using tongs) until the edges are charred. Flip and repeat on the other side.
Steps 9-12 for making chicken street tacos.

To assemble tacos: Lay tortillas on a plate. Top with a spoonful of chicken, pico de gallo, and crumbled queso fresco. Top with sour cream, if desired.

Chicken street tacos on white platter.

Additional Topping Options:

Check out the free printable, “Taco Topping Ideas” for more, out-of-the-box ideas for toppings, or here are the most common:

  • Pickled onions
  • Fresh cilantro
  • Shredded lettuce
  • Shredded cheese
  • Fresh or pickled jalapenos
  • Homemade salsa
  • Charred corn or corn salsa
  • Crushed chips (like we used on our Easy Taco Salad Recipe)

Or, you’ll really love this avocado salsa to pour on top! We use a lot of these same toppings on this walking taco casserole recipe and fried tacos too if you’re meal planning!

Recipe FAQs

How to cook chicken for chicken street tacos?

You can cook chicken on the stovetop in a skillet, bake it in the oven, grill it, smoke the chicken or whatever your preferred method is.

What kind of chicken should you use for chicken street tacos?

Chicken breasts, chicken thighs, or your favorite type of chicken can be used for this recipe.

How do you know when chicken is done?

The internal temperature of chicken should reach 165° F for it to be considered safe to eat.

More Mexican Recipes

Love easy chicken recipes? Then you’ll LOVE these chicken fajitas!

We are also huge fans of this chicken taco casserole and these slow-cooker chicken enchiladas!

If you’re looking for more taco recipes in general, these slow-cooker shredded beef tacos are delicious for dinner!

Or don’t miss these reader favorites:

If you enjoyed this post, be sure to follow me on Instagram, Facebook, Pinterest and YouTube! Share a photo of your recipe and use the hashtag #Fantabulosity so I can find it and follow along!

Recipe

Chicken Street Tacos on white plate.
Print Pin
5 from 8 votes

Chicken Street Tacos

These chicken street tacos can be made quickly, after marinating for about 30 minutes, and have such amazing flavor. Top with your favorite taco toppings and enjoy for taco night!
Course Main Course
Cuisine Mexican
Prep Time 1 hour
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 433kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 2 boneless skinless chicken breasts
  • 3 Tablespoons olive oil, divided
  • 2 Tablespoons taco seasoning
  • 1 lime, juiced
  • 18 street corn or flour tortillas
  • pico de gallo
  • crumbled queso fresco
  • sour cream

Instructions

  • Cut and Marinate Chicken: Filet the chicken so that you have 4 thinly sliced pieces of chicken. In a bowl, whisk together 2 tablespoons olive oil, taco seasoning and juice of lime. Add chicken and toss to coat. Marinate for 30 minutes to an hour.
  • Heat Tortillas: Wrap tortillas in a damp paper towel and microwave for 30 seconds to a minute, until warmed through. Wrap in foil then place in a warm oven until ready to serve.
  • Cook Chicken: Heat a large cast iron skillet over medium heat. Add remaining tablespoon of olive oil to the hot skillet. Add chicken and cook for 2 to 3 minutes per side, until juices run clear. Remove to a cutting board and let rest for 5 minutes. Dice into small pieces.
  • To assemble: lay tortillas on a plate. Top with a spoonful of chicken, pico de gallo and crumbled queso fresco. Top with sour cream, if desired.

Nutrition

Serving: 3tacos | Calories: 433kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 48mg | Sodium: 1103mg | Potassium: 416mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 485IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 99mg | Iron: 4mg

20+ No-Bake Desserts

With these no-bake desserts, there’s no need to turn on the oven to make your sweet tooth happy! This collection of dessert recipes that are also “no bake” has something for everyone. From Oreo Nutella cheesecake which is as dreamy as it sounds, to a cool and creamy orange fluff salad, this list has something for everyone on it, no matter what you are craving!

Image collage of no bake desserts with text overlay.

If you are in search of summer desserts that need no baking and taste amazing, you are in the perfect place because we have a ton of no-bake recipes here. Some would even work perfectly for a date-night or date-day picnic food idea.

I have tried and tested a whole bunch of tasty treats in my kitchen so that you can indulge your family and get great results every time. These recipes are easy to make and require common pantry supplies to create decadent desserts.

Grab your favorites below, and make sure to check out all of the other easy recipes on the blog!

Oreo Nutella Cheesecake

This cheesecake brings Oreo cookies and Nutella together to make a dreamy and creamy no bake treat that is perfect for curing those chocolate cravings! 

Peanut butter M&M Cheese ball with pretzels

M&M Chocolate Chip Cheese Ball

This cheese ball has so much chocolate flavor! It has m&m candies, chocolate chips and a great peanut butter center. Serve with cookies or graham crackers for a great no bake treat.

no bake peanut butter pie with peanut butter cups

Peanut Butter Pie 

This pie is packed with luscious peanut butter flavor! This dessert needs no baking, and has plenty of peanut butter cups sprinkled over the top to satisfy your chocolate cravings.

no bake cherry cheesecake

Cherry Cheesecake

This cheesecake has loads of cherries for a classic combo that tastes amazing. One bite of this and you will agree, this is an absolute dream dessert.

Peanut Butter and chocolate bars no bake candy

Peanut Butter Chocolate Bars 

This recipe makes something even better than Reese’s! Layer peanut butter and chocolate and chill for a few hours then slice this homemade candy and share it with anyone with a sweet tooth! 

Slice of possum pie on a white plate, sitting next to a fork with a bite.

Possum Pie

When you combine the flavors of cream cheese, pudding, whipped cream, and a peach-shortbread crust, you can’t go wrong. This possum pie is full of flavor! (And no, don’t worry, no actual possum was actually used in this recipe!)

Chocolate pie with oreo crust and whipped cream

No Bake Chocolate Pie

If you like creamy chocolate pudding then this pie is just the thing to make for an easy no bake dessert.  You will love the layers of chocolate combined with an oreo crust.

Banana pudding dip with wafers, fruit and pretzels

Banana Pudding Dip

This dip has all of the flavor of banana pudding, but it is made for dipping! Pretzels, fruit or cookies make this snack especially yummy.

Cheesecake stuffed strawberries

Cheesecake Stuffed Strawberries

Split your berries then stuff them cheesecake for a bite sized dessert that looks amazing but isn’t too hard to make. These need no baking and are nothing short of decadent.

edible chocolate chip cookie dough in a glass jar

Edible Cookie Dough

This egg free recipe needs no baking, just grab a spoon and grab a bite or two. You can whip this up in 15 minutes for cookie dough cravings.

cream cheese chocolate pie

Cream Cheese Chocolate Pie

Chocolate pie is perfect for a creamy frozen dessert. You can whip this up in minutes and enjoy it on a hot summer night.

angel food cake cubes with blueberries and strawberries.

Mixed Berry Trifles

If you love berries and white cake together then these trifles make for such a good dessert. Use store-bought angel food cake and mixed summer berries for a fast and flavorful no bake treat.

biscoff fudge with biscoff cookies

Biscoff Fudge 

Bring cookie butter flavor to creamy fudge with this easy no bake recipe. This biscoff fudge makes for a great gift or an indulgent snack to munch on.

Pudding, cool whip and oreo cookies layered in a baking dish

The Best Oreo Dessert

The only way to describe this dessert is that it is the best! Layers of luscious Cool Whip, cream cheese, and Oreo cookies create a decadent sweet to share with anyone who loves cookies and cream flavor.

No bake oreo mousse layered in a bowl with oreo cookies

Oreo Mousse

Bring Oreo flavor with this easy-to-make-at-home mousse! This no-bake dessert is perfect for those days when you crave cookies and cream flavor.

Banana cream pie slice with banana bunch

Banana Cream Pie

This no-bake pie is luscious, creamy and has so much banana flavor. Since it has fruit in the mix, it totally counts as a healthier dessert.

Peanut butter cup brownie trifle in a glass bowl

Brownie Peanut Butter Cup Trifle

This trifle has a great medley of flavors; peanut butter, brownies and cheesecake! You are going to love this easy dessert for a no bake treat that is easy to assemble. Take this along to a picnic or party for a dreamy indulgence that everyone will compliment.

No bake s'mores cheesecae with marshmallows, hershey bars

S’mores Cheesecake

Bring the flavor of summer to your next cheesecake. This no bake pie is packed with gooey s’mores flavors and will absolutely hit the spot after dinner.

Booty dip in a bowl with graham crackers on top.

Booty Dip

Grab 6 ingredients and start mixing! This viral booty dip is an awesome last-minute treat to make that requires no baking. What will you dip with? Cookies or graham crackers? Or maybe even berries? This dip would be amazing to serve as an indoor picnic food idea too.

Snickers salad with apples and mini candy bars

Snickers Apple Salad

Bring Snickers candy and crisp apples together into this salad. Make no mistake, this is absolutely a dreamy dessert and you won’t need to turn on the oven to make it.

Orange fluff salad with mandarin oranges and mini marshmallows

Orange Fluff Salad

This fluffy dish has loads of oranges and cream flavor! Add plenty of mini marshmallows to make this dessert extra special! 

More Dessert Recipes

If you love easy dessert recipes, then you’ll love these popular recipes that have been loved by many.

The BEST Side Salad Recipe

This is the BEST side salad recipe you’ll ever have! It’s the requested side dish at family gatherings and not your ordinary run-of-the-mill side salad.

There’s a SECRET! How to cut the lettuce and add these two common spices that change your salad-making life, and you can see more about this below.

Best Salad Recipe in White Plate with Red Napkin

Of all of the salad recipes we’ve ever had, this is by far the favorite and easy side salad to serve alongside your favorite dinner recipes, whether it’s a steak in the oven recipe, creamy lemon chicken pasta, chicken drumsticks in the oven, air fryer fish, or whatever the main course is!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Expert Tip:

If you’re making this salad as a main dish, you should try making this tuna salad recipe to go on top of it! You won’t believe how delicious the creaminess of the tuna, adds to the salad… so much so, that you may not even need a dressing! It’s the perfect lunch or light dinner!

What Makes it the BEST Green Salad:

I have to thank my mother-in-law for teaching me how to make the BEST of the best when it comes to side salad recipes. The woman has some serious salad skills and I couldn’t wait to share her secret with you. Don’t worry, I asked for her permission!

For this side salad, there are two ingredients and a certain way to cut the lettuce.

I bet you even have the two ingredients in your pantry!

Tips on How to Make the Best Salad

So there are a few secrets to the best side salad recipe that has literally left people saying,

I don’t know what it is, but it’s SO good! Why is it so good!?

Well, it’s a couple of things.

1. How the Lettuce is Cut

Two image collage of cutting romaine lettuce.

Romaine Lettuce:

You’ll want to use romaine for a side salad. I’ve used other greens like, mixed greens, leaf lettuce and head lettuce and although they’ll do in a pinch, those types of lettuce don’t measure up to romaine. However, what’s even better than just romaine is a combination of TWO different kinds of greens…

Using Spinach Too:

Using fresh spinach along with romaine is definitely optional but it REALLY adds a delicious texture to the salad.

Even as someone who’s not a huge fan of spinach salads, I always try to incorporate a small handful of chopped spinach in to this salad now because it makes a wonderful difference.

How to Cut Romaine Lettuce (and Spinach)

The key is chopping the lettuce into small pieces and removing the white part (the stem) because it can overpower and cause your salad to taste bitter.

Have you ever eaten a “chopped salad” at a restaurant and found the texture and flavor to be so much more amazing than a head-lettuce or romaine salad with all of the white crunchy pieces like you typically find on a salad bar?

This is why it’s so good. The lettuce is easier to eat, less bitter and so much more enjoyable.

Side salad with toppings in clear bowl.
There are 2 ingredients that make this salad the best!

The 2 Ingredients That Make It the BEST Salad

Basil & Garlic Powder.

Isn’t that EASY?

This combination on a salad is dynamite. I’m talking dried basil and garlic powder that you probably already have in your pantry. (But if you have fresh basil, chop a few leaves up instead of dried and the flavor is even more incredible!)

Sprinkle on your desired taste preference, and toss.

By FAR one of my favorite touches to this side salad. It’s easy, and it makes a HUGE difference for your salad…. making it the BEST salad recipe of all time. At least in our house! 🙂

Side Salad Ingredients and Toppings

Salad ingredients on plate with dressing on the side.
Pick your favorite salad ingredients and dressing

Along with the right lettuce and the garlic powder and basil, we love adding our favorite toppings!

Feel free to use what you like and take out what you don’t!

  • Carrots
  • Celery
  • Hard-Boiled Eggs
  • Shredded Cheese – bagged is just fine but fresh shredded block cheddar is amazing!
  • Bacon (or Air Fryer Bacon)
  • Tomato
  • Cucumber
  • Radish
  • Sunflower Seeds
  • Green Onions
  • Croutons (especially these brioche croutons)

Or turn your side salad in to a main dish by adding proteins like:

Toppings Tip: Cutting the lettuce in to small bite-size pieces is important. But if you chop all of your toppings too, it makes it even better!

Dinner salad on white plate with red and white cloth.
The perfect dinner salad

Making This Simple Salad Ahead of Time

We have this salad at least a couple of times a week at home. It gets in our veggies, and it takes a lot of guesswork out of what we are going to have alongside our main dish because it goes with almost everything!

I’ve never been a huge fan of making a large salad in bulk because I’ve been told that cut lettuce won’t “keep” as long in the refrigerator.

But I AM a fan of pre-chopping the ingredients and putting them in containers ahead of time, so my side dishes get easier and easier throughout the week.

See more make-ahead salads that we love!

Recipe FAQs

What kind of dressing is best for a side salad?

Feel free to top it with the dressing of your choice, but we are HUGE fans of making the Hidden Valley Ranch Buttermilk Dressing, with the seasoning packet that you can make with mayo and buttermilk! See below.

What is a side salad?

A small green salad to serve alongside a main dish recipe, that usually includes a house dressing or favorite salad dressing like ranch, blue cheese, or oil & vinegar!

How big is a side salad?

Plan on 1 to 1 ½ cups of salad for a side salad to go with dinner.

Homemade Salad Dressing

For this salad recipe, there’s no better dressing than this homemade salad dressing, using Hidden Valley Buttermilk Ranch, Restaurant Style!

Ingredients:

  • 1 package of Hidden Valley Buttermilk Recipe (Restaurant Style)
  • 1 cup mayo
  • 1 cup buttermilk (you can use regular milk if that’s all you have but the buttermilk is thicker and is much better!)

Mix all three ingredients together and chill for about 30 minutes. Drizzle on this green salad and enjoy!

Store any remaining salad dressing in the refrigerator in an air-tight container or mason jar!

Or, if you love a spicy kick, you may love this homemade jalapeno ranch dressing instead!

Hidden Valley Buttermilk Ranch Dressing Packet.
Our favorite dressing for a salad – Hidden Valley Ranch Restaurant Style Dressing

More Salad Recipes

We’re BIG fans of salad around here, whether that’s pasta salad, a quick lettuce salad, savory salads, or dessert salads. If you love them too, here are our favorite salad recipes, that I think you’ll love, especially this crab salad that we’re addicted to!

More Side Dishes

You may also love these side dishes that are popular with others:

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

More Lettuce Salad Recipes You’ll Love:

Recipe

side salad on white plate drizzled with ranch
Print Pin
4.18 from 553 votes

The BEST Side Salad Recipe

The BEST Side Salad Recipe: There’s a SECRET to this salad, and it tops all salad recipes we’ve tried!
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 5 servings
Calories 222kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 3 heads romaine lettuce See how to cut and remove stalk
  • 2 cups chopped fresh spinach optional
  • 1 tablespoon dried basil or fresh!
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder or more/less if you prefer!
  • ½ cup shredded cheddar cheese For best results, shred your own block cheese
  • 1 roma tomato chopped
  • 3-4 slices cooked bacon chopped
  • 2 boiled eggs chopped
  • ¼ cup celery chopped
  • ¼ cup carrots chopped
  • 1 radish chopped
  • 1 stalk green onions chopped
  • 1 tablespoon sunflower seeds hulled

Instructions

  • Slice romaine leaves off of white stems, (discard white stems) and chop lettuce into small pieces and pour in large serving bowl. If also using fresh spinach, chop and add to romaine in bowl.
  • Next layer on your favorite toppings, such as chopped tomato, bacon, eggs, radishes, green onions, celery, carrots, sunflower seeds and cheddar cheese.
  • Sprinkle the garlic powder and the dried basil on top.
  • Serve with choice of dressing. (Our favorite is to make the Hidden Valley Buttermilk Ranch dressing, with the seasoning packet, buttermilk and mayo.)

Video

Notes

TIPS to make this the best side salad:
  • Chop everything in to small pieces, including the lettuce.
  • We love using Hidden Valley Buttermilk Ranch for dressing (The packet that you make with mayo and buttermilk) and making this before starting the salad so it can sit in the refrigerator for 30 minutes, according to package directions.
  • If you want to make this ahead of time, chop up the toppings and store them separately so the toppings don’t make the lettuce soggy.
Topping Ideas: 
Carrots, radishes, green onions, tomatoes, cooked bacon, hard-boiled eggs, celery, sunflower seeds, and shredded cheddar cheese.

Nutrition

Serving: 1salad (⅕ recipe; without dressing) | Calories: 222kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 95mg | Sodium: 233mg | Potassium: 1177mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 35288IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 256mg | Iron: 5mg

30-Minutes or Less Dinners

This collection of 30-minute or less dinners has so many tasty and simple meal ideas for you. These recipes have been tested to bring great meals to your family in a flash, so you can turn to them when meal planning.

30 minute dinner ideas collage with text overlay.

On a really busy day, it can be so tempting to open an app on your phone and order dinner to go, or even worse, hop in line at the drive-thru.

Even on the most hectic of days, your family still needs to eat, and cereal just won’t cut it. Luckily for you, I have gathered 20 of our favorite 30 minute or less dinner ideas. From Instant Pot cheeseburger macaroni to stovetop skillet burgers, this list has hearty, delicious dinner ideas to please your hungry family.

📌 Don’t forget to save these recipes to your dinner board on Pinterest for future reference.

If you have a lot of ground beef in the freezer, you’ll also want to bookmark this list of ground beef dinner recipes.

Burger with melted cheese, being opened to show cheese pull.

Burgers in the Oven

With a special “trick” these burgers have been claimed as the best burgers, and even better than Mcdonald’s! Besides tasting delicious, these burgers are made in under 30 minutes!

Pasta with buffalo chicken and green onions on a blue plate

Instant Pot Buffalo Chicken Pasta

Bring big bold buffalo chicken flavors to a comforting pasta dish. This meal cooks in the instant pot in minutes to make such a delicious dinner! Add a salad to the side for a fast and filling busy night meal.

Pepperoni, salami and ham on a mini bun with peppers and cheese

Italian Sliders

Prep these in the morning, and bake them in a half an hour for a casual family dinner. With three different deli meats in the mix, these little sliders are sure to satisfy! 

Instant pot cheeseburger macaroni. Noodles with ground beef

Instant Pot Cheeseburger Macaroni

Skip the box and get homemade hamburger helper flavor on the table in a flash thanks to your instant pot. This dish is cheesy, filling and so tasty.

Kielbasa and cabbage

Kielbasa and Cabbage in the Instant Pot

If you have 9 minutes, you can have this comfort food classic on the table. Kielbasa and cabbage make for a budget-friendly meal that cooks super fast and will fill up the hungriest family. Pair with potatoes or bread for a complete meal.

Buffalo chicken soup with fritos and green onions in a white bowl

Buffalo Chicken Soup

Get creamy, spicy soup ready in just 30 minutes. This has the bold flavor of buffalo wings, in a comforting soup form. This is a great dish to make ahead of time as a part of your meal prep, and the soup freezes beautifully for a future busy night.

Cheeseburger on bun with red onions, pickle

Stovetop Burgers 

A juicy, flavorful burger is only about 15 minutes away with this recipe that makes them in a skillet, on the stovetop. These make for a classic busy night meal the family won’t mind sinking their teeth into!

Taco pasta in skillet with fresh cilantro on top.

Taco Pasta

Craving tacos? This pasta dish has all of the flavors you desire, in an easy to make on a weeknight pasta. This dish is great hot, but you can also serve it cold if you need to make dinner ahead of time. I think it is even better chilled.

A burger served on waffles with cheese.

Waffle Burgers 

The trendiest burger joint has nothing on these homemade burgers! Skip the bun and use waffles for a tasty and fun twist on a classic busy night meal.

Sausages baked in a white oven dish

Oven Cooked Sausages

No need to fire up the grill to get perfectly cooked sausages. This recipe makes them in the oven for home-cooked fast food. Pair these sausages with a great bun and some fries for a family friendly 15-minute meal.

classic chicken and noodles served in a white bowl

Chicken and Noodles

Get classic chicken and noodle flavor on the table in 25 minutes for a feel good family dinner that is wholesome and hearty. Serve with tender spring peas and rolls for a complete meal.

Fried leftover spaghetti with garlic bread

Fried Spaghetti

This recipe puts leftovers to good work. Repurpose leftover spaghetti to make this dish that is ready in ten minutes. Your kids are going to love the crispy bites of pasta.

chicken thighs with lemons in a blue and white bowl

Instant Pot Chicken Thighs

Pull out your instant pot to make this budget friendly meal in just about a half an hour. Chicken thighs are economical to buy and this recipe makes them tastier than ever.

Air fryer chicken wings with sauce

Air Fryer Chicken Wings

Frozen wings are ready in just 25 minutes with this easy air fryer recipe. You can get these on the table faster than Wingstop can deliver, and the results are just as delicious!

Beef and cheese burrito
Beef and Cheese Burritos

Beef and Cheese Burritos

With just a handful of simple ingredients, these burritos are not only a kid-favorite but everyone seems to love them because they can customize their own with their favorite toppings!

Spoonful of chicken bacon ranch pasta
Chicken Bacon Ranch Pasta Recipe

Chicken Bacon Ranch Pasta

Anytime you combine the flavors of chicken, bacon, and ranch, it’s going to be good! These are the ultimate flavors to add to pasta for a filling family meal that you can prep in the morning and bake when you get home from work.

chili chicken on rice

Chilli Chicken

If you have been craving Indian food, then you will want to make this chili chicken asap. It is tangy, smoky, and sweet, and best of all, you can get this ready in just 25 minutes.

burger sliders
Baked Burger Sliders

Cheeseburger Sliders

There’s a trick to make these cheeseburger sliders even easier! Simply cook a large burger patty and easily place them on slider buns for a delicious burger slider.

sloppy joe sliders on seeded buns with cheese

Sloppy Joe Sliders

While these sliders might be small in size, they are absolutely loaded with cheese and meat! Make these with tots or a simple side for a meal your family will devour. 

Chili in small white bowl.

Easy Chili Recipe

With this easy chili recipe, it’s the perfect base for everyone’s favorite toppings. Just a few ingredients, and you’ll have a warm delicious pot of chili (that can easily be doubled or tripled to feed a crowd) ready for dinner!

More Easy Dinner Recipes

We know what it’s like to always try and think of something new for dinner. Here are some of our favorite other dinner recipes that you’ll love:

We love gathering recipes for you, depending on cuisine, ingredient, holiday, or season! See all of our amazing recipe collections!

20 Spring Dinner Ideas

These spring dinner ideas are easy to make, light, and filling! If you want to spend less time in the kitchen, and more time outdoors, tending to your flower beds, or playing with the kids, then you are in the right place, and you’ll love these recipes. You may even want to plan some of these dinners for an indoor picnic if the spring brings rain showers!

I have gathered 20 of my favorite spring dinner ideas to share with you. These easy spring dinners have been tried and tested to bring quick and delicious dinners to your table, just like our summer dinner ideas! However, if you’re meal planning for your family, make sure to also visit all of our other easy dinner recipes to get a lot of ideas!

Spring dinner ideas collage

Easy Spring Recipes

From easy mozzarella wraps that have juicy tomatoes and basil tucked inside for a cheesy dinner that has Caprese vibes to a light, and really tasty sausage Alfredo pasta that makes for a satisfying one-dish meal. I know you will find a few recipes that you want to save to your meal ideas pinterest board or to save when you’re planning that spring picnic and need an easy picnic food idea.

You can even pair most of these dinners with this spring mix salad!

Mozzarella wrap with tomato and basil.

Mozzarella Wrap with Tomato and Basil

No need to spend a lot of time making dinner. With this wholesome and healthy mozzarella wrap with tomato and basil, you can grab a quick bite that captures the best fresh flavors, so you can get back to enjoying a lovely spring day.

Cajun shrimp stuffed baked potatoes.

Shrimp Baked Potatoes 

Baked potatoes might be a simple side, but with this recipe you can make them a satisfying meal. Load baked potatoes up with creamy cajun shrimp for a filling and easy dinner that your family will love on a warm spring night. 

Cheesy stuffed portobello mushrooms

Baked Portobello Mushrooms 

Stuff meaty portobello mushrooms with cream cheese and then add even more cheese. The result is a recipe for the best baked portobellos you have ever had!

Instant pot risotto in a white bowl

Instant Pot Risotto 

This easy and fast instant pot risotto is so delicious that you might want to make a meal of this on a busy spring night. Serve with asparagus or a salad for a very comforting dinner that is ready in no time.

Chopped Italian salad with pasta, bacon and cheese

Chopped Italian Salad

With pasta, bacon, bleu cheese, honey mustard and more, this chopped salad makes for a great spring dinner idea that is light, healthy and completely delicious.

Smoked sausage, rice and veggies in a skillet with a spoon

Skinny Mexican Skillet 

This Mexican skillet makes for a great dinner option the whole family will enjoy. Using smoked sausage in this dish makes it budget-friendly and super simple to prepare on a night when you would rather be outdoors!

Creamy lemon pasta with chicken

Creamy Lemon Chicken Pasta 

This creamy lemon chicken pasta is perfect for a simple yet satisfying spring meal. This combination of flavors tastes like a rival dish from your favorite restaurant.

Chicken street tacos with lime juice being squeezed over the tacos

Chicken Street Tacos

No need to search out a food truck to get street taco flavor. This recipe is ready in no time for a recipe that cures your cravings for Mexican food.

Chipotle apple butter ribs on the grill

Chipotle Apple Butter Grilled Ribs

Apple butter and chipotle make for a sweet and spicy combo that is perfect for ribs. Toss a rack on the grill for a meal that is made for enjoying on the deck on a warm evening.

Buffalo chicken topped hot dogs on napkin

Buffalo Chicken Hot Dogs

Don’t turn your nose up at the idea of hot dogs for a spring meal. This recipe makes for a mash-up meal that is absolutely delicious. Buffalo chicken flavor meets hot dogs for a dinner that is as tasty as it is unique.

Meatball stuffed peppers with cheese over the top

Meatball Stuffed Peppers

Stuffed peppers are always a good dinner idea, but this recipe makes them so easy! Pop a meatball into the mix for great flavor and a time saver.

Fritos with cheese, onions and chili.

Frito Chili Pie

Cheese, chips, chili, and onions come together to make a really delicious dinner that is easy to assemble and is fun to eat. If you need to take dinner on the go for spring sports with the kids, use individual bags of Fritos.

Panko crusted cod with a fork and broccoli on a plate

Panko Crusted Cod 

Spring meals are meant to be delicious, nutritious, and not too heavy. This panko-crusted cod is just the thing to make. Serve with a salad for a healthy meal you will want to keep on your meal plan.

Marinated shrimp in a white bowl

Grilled Marinated Shrimp

Fire up the grill to make these deliciously marinated shrimp. These are awesome in a salad, or served with fresh veggies. My family especially enjoys tacos made from this recipe.

Juicy grilled pork chops with asparagus on a white plate

Sweet and Smoky Grilled Pork Chops 

This easy grilled pork chop recipe is budget-friendly and so tasty. Use bone in chops for a meal that cooks in about 6 minutes for the perfect balance of sweet and smoky.

Fish finger tacos with cheese, avocado, chips and salsa

 Fish Finger Tacos 

This recipe for tacos puts leftover fish fingers to work. With the hummus and avocados, this is such a good spring meal idea that brings great flavor to the table.

cream cheese pasta in stainless skillet

Cream Cheese Pasta

It’s light, it’s filling, and it’s easy to make. This cream cheese pasta recipe only takes 20 minutes to make and only 7 ingredients.

Air fryer brats on a plate with buns

Air Fryer Brats 

Pop some brats into your air fryer and get dinner ready in just a few minutes. You are going to appreciate that this dinner requires very little clean up. Add some fries and a veggie for a fast meal.

Chicken caesar salad with pasta in a bowl

Chicken Caesar Pasta Salad 

Salads are always a good dinner idea on a nice spring evening. This recipe brings pasta salad and chicken Caesar salad together into a really delicious meal that satisfies without being too filling.

Smoked sausage with noodles and peas

Sausage Alfredo Pasta

Adding smoked sausage into pasta alfredo makes for a really yummy and easy meal idea that the entire family will love. This one-dish meal has budget-friendly smoked sausage and tender spring peas for a complete meal.

🍽 Spring Side Dishes

Now that you’ve found some great spring dinner ideas for spring, how about some of these amazing side dishes that you’ll love:

Make sure to check this list of no bake dessert recipes to make after your spring dinner!

We love gathering recipes for you, depending on cuisine, ingredient, holiday, or season! See all of our amazing recipe collections!

Recipe

Spring dinner ideas collage
Print Pin
5 from 3 votes

20 Spring Dinner Ideas

Some of the best easy spring dinner ideas that are delicious and that use simple ingredients. One of our favorites is this oven baked cod.
Course Main Course
Cuisine American
Prep Time 7 minutes
Cook Time 14 minutes
Total Time 21 minutes
Servings 4 filets
Calories 705kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

Oven Baked Cod Recipe

  • 1 pound cod filets about 4 pieces
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 Tablesppon fresh lemon juice
  • 2 teaspoons Mrs. Dash Table Blend
  • ⅛ teaspoon cayenne pepper
  • 1 Tablespoon grated parmesan cheese
  • ⅓ cup plain panko crumbs
  • 2 Tablespoons butter melted
  • 2 Tablespoons fresh parsley finely chopped

Instructions

  • Grease a 9 x13 baking dish or sheet pan and preheat the oven to 425 degrees.
  • Coat fish with lemon juice then sprinkle salt and pepper over filets. Place Cod filets into a greased baking pan. (Note: if using frozen filets be sure to press as much water as possible out of the filets before seasoning.)
  • In a small bowl mix cayenne pepper, Mrs. Dash, parmesan cheese, and Panko crumbs together.
  • Pour in melted butter; mix well to coat the crumbs. Then stir in fresh parsley.
  • Spoon crumb mixture evenly onto the top of the fish filets. Press crumbs into fish.
  • Place the pan into the oven and bake for 12-14 minutes until the fish is flakey and opaque throughout.
  • Serve with fresh lemons and garnish with additional parsley if desired.

Nutrition

Serving: 1filet | Calories: 705kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 86g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 260mg | Sodium: 1829mg | Potassium: 2117mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1876IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 334mg | Iron: 7mg

Free “Hello Summer” Printable

This “hello summer” free printable is perfect to frame, and show off in your home, or even fun if you’re hosting a summer party and you’re looking for table decor.

I absolutley love giving you free printables to download and use, and this summer printable is no different.

What I love about this printable is that it’s simple, classic and looks good with almost any decor or color scheme you plan to use it with. I personally think it would look amazing on a table when you’re hosting, sitting next to some summer cocktails, and next to some of these delicious summer dinner ideas that may be sitting on the table too.

You could also even include a framed copy of this inside of this sunshine gift basket for an adorable touch.

Hello summer printable - free download.

I hope you enjoy this super cute summer printable. Simply click the “Download the printable HERE” button below, to get your free download that’s not watermarked! It was created as an 8.5 x 11 pdf but if your printer settings allow you to print smaller, such as a 5×7, etc. that should work too!

Download the Printable HERE!

More Printables You’ll Love:

Don’t forget to download this “End of Summer” checklist too, to make sure you don’t forget to do your favorite things, and grab this list of summer snacks to take on your adventures!

Pink Champagne Cupcakes

Pink Champagne Cupcakes: A from-scratch (and also a cake mix recipe option) recipe that walks you through exactly how to make sparkling wine or champagne cupcakes!

Cupcake recipes are perfect for birthday parties or for a weekend treat. You’re also going to love our popular Biscoff cupcakes, these Oreo cupcakes and of course, our caramel cupcakes!

Orignally published in December of 2019 – Updated in April 2018

Pink champagne cupcake on marble counter.

Then, if you want to really make an impression, whip up a batch of these easy pink chocolate strawberries to go along with them!

It is NO secret around here how much I love easy desserts for parties and even just to make for fun after main course!

💞 Why You’ll Love these Cupcakes

  • Pink Color: They’re a beautiful pink cupcake that’s perfect for a pink-themed party, or to add a bit of prettiness to any gathering.
  • Easy Recipe: They’re easy, whether you choose to make them from scratch or with the cake mix recipe, also below.
  • Flexible: There are a few areas where you may prefer to leave some items out, or even add more of something. You’ll see how you can make this recipe with your own preferences, with the tips throughout the recipe.
Pink champagne bottle.

How to Make Pink Champagne Cupcakes from Scratch

Before you start mixing together the ingredients, preheat the oven to 325 degrees and line a cupcake baking pan with paper liners and set aside.

Champagne Reduction (Not as difficult as it sounds!)

Pink champagne in saucepan.
  1. Open the bottle of champagne and measure out 1 ½ cups of champagne. 
  2. Pour it into a saucepan and simmer for about 6-8 minutes and let it reduce until there’s only ¾ cup of liquid remaining (image above).
  3. Let this concentrated liquid cool down to room temperature before adding to your batter.
  4. Reserve 1-2 Tablespoons for the buttercream frosting.
Flour and dry ingredients in white bowl with whisk.
  1. Next, in a small bowl, measure and whisk together flour, baking powder, salt and set aside (image above).
  2. In a separate bowl, use a mixer to beat butter and vanilla together until smooth and creamy.
  3. Then, add sugar, vegetable oil and eggs. Continue mixing until combined.
Pink champagne pouring in to mixing bowl.
  1. Set the mixer to medium speed, gradually alternate between adding flour mixture and concentrated liquid champagne (image above).
  2. Stir until each one is almost completely combined before adding the next and scrape down the sides and bottom of the bowl as you work.

Pink Food Coloring – Optional

To make your cupcakes a little more pink, feel free to use pink food coloring in to the batter before baking!

Pro Tip: Just a small amount of pink food coloring will do. A simple dip in to the food coloring with a toothpick will add a significant amount of color.

Mix until fully blended!

However, if you aren’t a fan of food coloring, it’s definitely not necessary!

Hand mixer mixing cupcakes in mixing bowl.
  1. On the cupcake batter is all mixed, fill the cupcake liners ¾ full and bake for 18-20 minutes!
Pink champagne cupcakes in baking pan.

How to Make Pink Champagne Buttercream Frosting

Now for the champagne icing, you can kick it up a notch on the champagne if you prefer, for a more intense champagne flavor.

Pro Tip: The recipe calls for 1 tablespoon of champagne reduction, but feel free to use 2 if you’re going big or going home!

While the cupcakes are baking, it’s a great time to whip up the buttercream frosting

Powdered sugar in measuring cup.
  1. In a large bowl, using an electric mixer, beat the butter, powdered sugar, vanilla and 1-2 tablespoons of the champagne reduction until smooth.
  2. Then, add milk as needed to reach the desired consistency!
  3. To add some pink color to your buttercream, this is the pink food coloring I recommend!

Pro Tip: It doesn’t take much food coloring! Simply dip of a toothpick into the coloring will add a great amount of color to your buttercream!

If using food coloring, mix thoroughly and set aside and wait for the cupcakes to fully cool before frosting!

How to Frost the Pink Cupcakes

Once the cupcakes have baked and have sat out to cool (it’s important to let them cool or the frosting will instantly melt and slide off of your cupcakes!) it’s time to frost those cuties!

Baked pink champagne cupcakes in cupcake tin.

Now I’m NO frosting and piping expert, but I have found it really easy to frost cupcakes when using a piping bag and tips!
Feel free to use any tips that you wish! My favorites are in a set of tips like these and disposable piping bags.

Piping pink champagne buttercream on top of cupcakes.

Cupcake Sprinkles and Toppings

Of course, you can decorate your cupcakes any way you like, but to have your cupcakes look like these, you can grab the following supplies here:

Pink champagne cupcakes on clear, glass cake stand.
Pink Champagne Cupcakes

How to Make Pink Champagne Cupcakes with a Cake Mix

If wanting to make these cupcakes using a box mix, it’s simple!
However, if scratch is more your style, see the printable recipe card below with full instructions!

Makes 24 cupcakes

Prep time:  12 minutes Cook time:  20 min Total Time: 22 minutes

  • 1 boxed white cake mix
  • 1 cup Pink Champagne reduce
  • ⅓ cup Vegetable Oil
  • 3 eggs
  • Pink food coloring

Cupcakes from Box Mix Directions:  

  1. Preheat the oven to 325 degrees. Line a cupcake baking tray with paper liners and set aside. 
  2. In a small saucepan over medium heat, add 2 cups Pink Champagne and simmer until it is reduced to 1 cup liquid, about 6-8 minutes.
    Set aside until room temperature. Reserve 1-2 Tablespoons to use in buttercream icing. 
  3. Combine Cake mix, oil, and eggs together until well blended.  Add a drop of pink coloring to the cooled reduced champagne to a light pink and stir well.  Add champagne reduction to the batter and blend well.
  4. Fill each paper cup ⅔ full and bake at 325 degrees for 18-20 minutes or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
Pink champagne cupcakes on marble counter.

❄️ How to Store the Cupcakes

  • Room Temperature: If you’d like to store the cupcakes at room temperature, it’s best to store them in an airtight container for up to 3 days.
  • Refrigerate: If you’d like to refrigerate these pink champagne cupcakes, place them in an air tight container, in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. (Do note, that sometimes refrigerating cupcakes can make them dry out more.)
  • Freeze: If freezing the cupcakes is something you need or want to do, freeze them without frosting, in a freezer-safe container (preferably also wrapping the cupcakes in Glad’s Press’n Seal — as we’ve found this is the best for freezing), for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: When ready to defrost the cupcakes, simply let them thaw in the container, on the counter before frosting.

Expert Tips

  • Feel free to use or buy any kind of pink champagne for this recipe. Because it will be reduced down, the quality doesn’t really matter. You just want to give the cupcakes that pop of spritz in the background!
  • Feel free to use a sparkling wine if that’s more of your style or what you have on hand.

Recipe FAQs

Can kids eat pink champagne cupcakes?

Yes! When cooked properly, cupcakes made with pink champagne should be safe to eat because during the reduction process, the alcohol is cooked out.

What can I substitute for pink champagne in baking?

If you prefer another sparkling beverage instead of pink champagne, you can try using sparkling grape juice.

Love Easy Dessert Recipes?

If you love easy desserts like we do, then you’ll also love these recent favorites:

Looking for a keto option for cupcakes? I love that we have options for this diet now. My son has to do keto often and these keto cupcakes come in handy!

Did You Make This?
Snap a pic and hashtag it #Fantabulosity — I love to see your creations on Instagram and Facebook.

Recipe

Pink champagne cupcake on white marble counter.
Print Pin
5 from 13 votes

Pink Champagne Cupcakes from Scratch

Pink Champagne Cupcakes: A from scratch AND box recipe option that will walk you through exactly how to make sparkling wine or champagne cupcakes!
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 24 cupcakes
Calories 207kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Equipment

  • oven

Ingredients

  • 1 ½ cups pink champagne or sparkling wine, divided
  • 1 stick salted butter room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
  • ½ cup vegetable oil
  • 2 cups granulated sugar
  • 1 ½ teaspoon baking powder
  • 2 ⅔ cups all-purpose flour
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • 4 large eggs
  • pink food coloring Just a small dip in to the coloring with a toothpick should be enough

Pink Champagne Buttercream Frosting

  • 1-2 tablespoon reserved pink champagne reduction
  • ½ cup unsalted butter room temperature
  • 2 cups confectioners sugar
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1-2 tablespoon milk as needed for desired consistency
  • Silver and gold sparkling sugar as desired

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 325 degrees. Line a cupcake baking pan with paper liners and set aside. 
  • Open the bottle and measure out 1 ½ cups of champagne.  Place in a saucepan and simmer for about 6-8 minutes and let it reduce until there’s only ¾ cup of liquid remaining. Let this concentrated liquid cool down to room temperature before adding to your batter. Reserve 1-2 Tablespoons for the buttercream frosting.
  • In a small bowl, measure and whisk together flour, baking powder, salt and set aside.
  • In a separate bowl, use an electric mixer to beat butter and vanilla together until smooth and creamy
  • Add sugar, vegetable oil and eggs (and pink food coloring if desired.) Continue mixing until combined.
  • Set the mixer to medium speed, gradually alternate between adding flour mixture and concentrated liquid champagne.  Stir until each one is almost completely combined before adding the next. Scrape down sides and bottom of the bowl as you work.
  • Fill cupcake liners ¾ full and bake for 18-20 minutes.

Pink Champagne Buttercream Frosting

  • In a large bowl, using an electric mixer, beat butter, powdered sugar, vanilla and 2 tablespoons of the champagne reduction until smooth. Add milk as needed to reach desired consistency.

Notes

*I personally prefer only 1 Tablespoon of the reduction in the buttercream recipe for a subtle flavor, but you can use 2 for a more intense champagne flavor*
See blog post for a cake mix (box) recipe for Pink Champagne Cupcakes!

Nutrition

Serving: 1cupcake | Calories: 207kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 37mg | Sodium: 46mg | Potassium: 38mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 157IU | Calcium: 9mg | Iron: 1mg

If you love easy desserts, then you really going to love this cookie dough fudge, no-bake chocolate oatmeal cookies, and peanut butter chocolate chip cookies!

20+ Make Ahead Salads for a Crowd

20+ Make Ahead Salads for a Crowd: Whether you’re whipping up an easy pasta salad, potato salad, or even just a standard lettuce side salad for your next get-together, salad recipes can be so easy to make ahead of time.

There are so many delicious ways to make a salad that can feed a crowd.

I’ve gathered some of the best make ahead salads for a crowd, so you have plenty to choose from when you need them!

Make ahead salad collage of images with text overlay.

Post originally published February 2019 – Updated April 2023

Make Ahead Salads for a Crowd

You’ll find that these make-ahead salads for a crowd are perfect for barbecue parties, cookouts, spring dinner recipe ideas, or any other fun parties where you need a dish. You can easily whip one of these up and you’re ready to go!

Or, if you like to make side dishes ahead of time or that easy to whip up in a pinch to go with dinner for your family, then you’ll find a fabulous amount of salad recipes to choose from here. (Salads are PERFECT as a side dish to accompany a ton of main dishes!)

20+ Salad Recipes for a Crowd

Wooden spoon holding serving of red skin potato salad.

Red Skin Potato Salad

This delicious and easy potato salad recipe is a side dish staple at any barbecue. Easy to make and it can be made in advance, and transports well!

Best Salad Recipe in White Plate with Red Napkin
The BEST Salad Recipe

The BEST Side Salad Recipe

This side salad recipe has gone CRAZY on Pinterest with so many fans! We make this often ahead of time, to eat on all week or to take to a function. TIP: Make sure to store the toppings separately that could make your lettuce soggy. (i.e. bacon, cheese, etc.)

EASY broccoli raisin salad recipe

Broccoli Salad

Loaded with both texture and flavor, this salad is a great way to change things up from a lettuce salad, and a great way to get in the greens.

Apple Snicker Salad in white bowl
Apple Snicker Salad

Snickers Salad

The crowd is going to LOVE this one as a dessert or to even have as a sweet side dish during the holidays. It’s one of our top favorite no bake dessert recipes, that we also consider a fun salad side dish.

Carrot salad in a white bowl, next to blue napkin.

Easy Carrot Salad Recipe

Get in your extra veggies with this veggie salad that has carrots, and a lot of crunch!

Thai salad in a wooden bowl.

Thai Salad with Noodles

A fantastic twist on a salad recipe that has texture and is full of flavor!

Apple salad with yogurt in white bowl.

Apple Salad

This crispy and sweet salad is a great dessert salad that you can make ahead of time!

Pistachio salad in bowl on black and white linen
Pistachio Salad

Pistachio Salad

This may be more of a dessert salad but it’s a crowd-pleaser for sure, and a great addition to any holiday table.

Chicken macaroni salad in brown wooden bowl.
Chicken Macaroni Salad

Chicken Macaroni Salad

This pasta salad is so simple to make, and a great go-to for any party. The addition of chicken adds protein to make it a light, yet hearty dish.

3 bean salad recipe - quick and easy and a great side dish idea

Three Bean Salad

A bean salad is a nice change from lettuce and pasta salads. It’s also perfect for cookouts or anywhere that you want to bring a healthier dish. 

Chopped Asian Salad with mandarin oranges

Asian Chopped Salad

This is a light salad recipe that’s perfect to serve in the spring and summer and is so easy to make.

This creamy cucumber crunch salad is a delicious side dish for potluck parties.

Creamy Crunchy Cucumber Salad

A fresh and light salad recipe for a hot summer day! Make it in advance, and pull it out of the refrigerator when it’s time to eat!

This low carb cauliflower potato salad is a great low carb recipe! So easy and definitely a low carb vegetable for the keto diet!

Cauliflower “potato” salad

If you’re counting carbs or watching carbohydrates, this faux potato salad recipe is perfect for low-carb eaters!

crab salad in white bowl with pink napkin underneath

Crab Salad

When it comes to make-ahead salad recipes, this crab salad is one that can be made in advance, and it only gets better with time!

caesar chicken pasta salad recipe in a white bowl on a marble table

Chicken Caesar Pasta Salad

It may sound different to put some of these ingredients together but talk about a flavor combination that you’ll love! This chicken Caesar pasta salad is a favorite at functions. When making it ahead of time though, it’s best to prep everything and store the dressing and pasta in different containers. Then, combine all of it just before serving.

Fruit salad with Cool Whip in gray bowl on counter.

Fruit Salad with Cool Whip

As seen on so many holiday tables, this dessert salad is one that can be made ahead of time, and is so easy to whip up!

cornbread salad

Cornbread Salad

This savory Cornbread Salad is the perfect combination of sweet, crunchy, and savory to make the perfect salad for your next get-together with friends. 

Italian Pasta Salad Recipe - This cold blend of ingredients is amazingly good! Love the bowtie pasta, and how easy it is!

Cold Italian Pasta Salad

An easy, cold salad that can be made in a pinch and that sits wonderfully and absorbs flavors. TIP: Take along extra dressing if it will be sitting a while, and drizzle with more dressing right before serving, in case the pasta soaks up the majority of the dressing.

A close up photo of a large oblong white bowl holding a fluffy orange desserts salad sprinkled on top with mini marshmallows and mandarin orange slices

Orange Fluff Salad

Have you seen this delicious pile of fluff at family reunions and holidays? It’s a popular recipe that so many love, and is one of the best make-ahead salad recipes, due to how long it can sit.

Tuna pasta salad in white bowl

Tuna Pasta Salad

A lovely combination of the creamy dressing, the tender pasta and the flavor of the tuna, all combe together to make a delicious pasta salad.

Honey lime fruit salad in white bowl.

Honey Lime Fruit Salad

This fruit salad is a wonderful way to make prep a make-ahead salad for any event or for snacking on during the week.

shrimp macaroni salad in bowl

Shrimp Macaroni Salad

Much like our tuna salad, this salad uses salad shrimp, and the combination of the seafood with the tender pasta is incredible.

Cold bacon ranch pasta salad in individual servings.

Bacon Ranch Pasta Salad

The cubed cheese, cooked bacon and tender pasta, all drenched in a creamy dressing is a pasta salad that will be a hit at the next reunion.

KFC Coleslaw in white bowl, sitting next to big bowl.

KFC Copycat Coleslaw Recipe

This easy coleslaw is such a great copycat recipe! So similar and it can be made at home in minutes!

You won’t find only salad recipes around here…

You’ll find TONS of easy recipes that can be made using everyday ingredients, that your family will love! Browse the easy recipes and pin your favorites!

What are some of your favorite make-ahead salads for a crowd? Share them right here in the comments below!

We love gathering recipes for you, depending on cuisine, ingredient, holiday, or season! See all of our amazing recipe collections!

French Toast Casserole

French Toast Casserole – This breakfast dish using French bread, heavy cream, brown sugar, and a blend of spices, smells, and tastes amazing in the morning! Perfect for a Mother’s Day brunch, Christmas morning, or a weekend breakfast.

Slice of french toast casserole on white plate with syrup and berries.

It’s also an easy breakfast casserole that you will make the night before and simply bake the next morning for a delicious recipe that the entire family will love, maybe even as much as the Brioche French Toast and Cinnamon Roll Casserole that’s REALLY popular!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love this Recipe

My favorite thing about making this French Toast Bake is that I can make it the night before, and practically throw the thing in the oven when I wake up. An hour later, it looks like I’ve been up since dawn, working my fingers to the bone, in the kitchen. Plus, it reminds me of my favorite bread pudding recipes so the fact that I can eat it for breakfast is like a little piece of heaven on earth.

It’s also an easy way to have a warm and comforting dish for a weekend morning for special occasions or just as a family tradition, and serve alongside this ham and cheese croissant casserole if feeding a large crowd.

How do you Keep French Toast Bake From Getting Soggy?

I’ve never had this recipe turn out soggy but if you do, make sure you’re using the right kind of bread. The best bread, is a crispy bread or bread such as:

  • French bread
  • Challah bread
  • Brioche
  • Italian bread
  • Stale, thick bread

This stale bread helps crisp up the casserole, especially since it sits all night.

Are French Toast Casserole and French Toast Bake the Same?

Yes! Although it may be called one or the other, the recipe typically uses the same ingredients and has the same cooking process so it’s essentially the same type of recipe.

Recipe Ingredients:

This recipe uses simple ingredients, and you may even have most, if not all, of them on hand already!

Labeled ingredients for french toast casserole.

How to Make this French Toast Casserole

Although you can find the full printable recipe card at the bottom of this post for this delicious French toast bake, I also like to share tips along the way to help you make the best overnight French toast bake!

PRO TIP: To allow enough time for the bread to soak up the batter, it’s ideal to make this dish the day or the night before you plan to serve it. However, it’s not a “must” but it would still be good to allow it to soak for a few hours if possible.

Grease a 9×13 casserole dish with butter or non-stick spray.

Steps 1-4 of French toast bake process.

Mix Together the Batter & Bread:

  1. Tear or cut the French bread into chunks/cubes, ( about 1-inch cubes) and place on the bottom of the baking dish, in a single layer and spread out the bread, the best that you can.
  2. In a separate mixing bowl, add whisk eggs, milk, cream white sugar, brown sugar & vanilla.
  3. Stir to mix the mixture evenly.
  4. Pour egg mixture over the top of the bread pieces, trying to coat/cover all of the bread. Cover the bread with a lid, aluminum foil, or plastic wrap, and store in the refrigerator until ready to bake. Preferably overnight.
Steps 5-8 of how to make French toast bake.

How to Make the Crumble Topping:

  1. In a medium bowl, pour the flour, brown sugar, cinnamon, salt, and nutmeg in a separate bowl.
  2. Mix together until evenly combined.
  3. Add the pieces of butter, and mix together with either a pastry cutter or a fork (supplementing your hands, combining the ingredients, until the texture is fine pebbles) to create the crumbly topping. Store the topping in the fridge, separate from the bread mixture, until right before baking.

How to Bake the French Toast Casserole:

Preheat over to 350 degrees F.

  1. Sprinkle the crumbly topping over the French toast mixture and bake uncovered for 1 hour or until golden brown on top.
Baked french toast casserole in white baking dish.

How to Serve the French Toast Casserole

This breakfast casserole is best, served with syrup, fresh berries, fresh fruit, or your favorite toppings!

Slice of French toast casserole on spatula.

What to do with Leftover French Toast Casserole

If you happen to have leftover French toast bake, you can store it in an airtight container, in the refrigerator for 3-5 days.

Syrup pouring over French toast casserole in white plate with blueberries.

Recipe FAQs

Can French toast casserole be frozen?

Yes! In a freezer-safe container, bake as instructed and then allow it to cool to room temperature.
Or, prepare up until adding the crumbly topping. (You will add this right before baking.)
How to Freeze: Wrap and/or cover the casserole, preferably in cling plastic wrap — as we’ve found this works best for freezing food — and freeze up to three months.
To Reheat: allow it to thaw in the refrigerator before reheating. When thawed, if fully baked, bake at 350° for 30 minutes or until heated through. If unbaked, thaw, top with crumbly topping, and bake as instructed in the recipe card.

Piece of French toast casserole on fork.

You’re also going to love this sheet pan pancakes recipe and our favorite pancakes from scratch, which are so comforting and easy to make! You’ll also love this brioche french toast, cinnamon french toast sticks, and this easy french toast recipe!

Recipe

Slice of French toast casserole on white plate with blueberries and strawberries.
Print Pin
4.80 from 10 votes

French Toast Casserole

A baked french toast casserole recipe that you can spend 15 minutes preparing, let sit overnight and then bake it in the morning. A delicious breakfast dish to serve out of town guests, or a hungry family!
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Resting Time 6 hours
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 12 servings
Calories 399kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 loaf French bread
  • butter or non-stick spray for coating casserole dish
  • 8 large eggs
  • 2 cups whole milk
  • ½ cup heavy cream
  • ½ cup sugar
  • ½ cup brown sugar
  • 2 Tablespoons pure vanilla extract

Topping:

  • ½ cup flour
  • ½ cup brown sugar packed
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • 1 pinch nutmeg
  • 1 stick butter cold; cut into pieces

Instructions

  • Grease a 9×13 casserole dish with butter or non-stick spray.
  • Tear or cut the French bread into chunks/cubes, and place on the bottom of the baking dish, spread out the best that you can.
  • In a separate bowl, mix the eggs, milk, cream white sugar, brown sugar & vanilla.
  • Pour egg mixture over the top of the bread pieces, trying to coat/cover all of the bread.
  • Cover the bread with a lid, aluminum foil or plastic wrap, and store in the refrigerator until ready to bake. Preferably overnight.

Topping:

  • In a medium bowl, mix together the flour, brown sugar, cinnamon, salt, and nutmeg in a separate bowl.
  • Add the pieces of butter, and mix together with either a pastry cutter or a fork (supplementing your hands, combining the ingredients, until the texture is fine pebbles) to create the crumbly topping.
  • Store topping in the fridge, separate from the bread mixture, until right before baking.

Bake the French Toast:

  • Preheat over to 350 degrees F.
  • Sprinkle crumbly topping over the french toast mixture.
  • Bake uncovered for 1 hour.
  • Serve with syrup, fresh berries or desired toppings.

Notes

Important to Note: To allow enough time for the bread to soak up the batter, it’s ideal to make this dish the day or the night before you plan to serve it. 
Freezing Instructions: In a freezer-safe container, bake as instructed and then allow it to cool to room temperature.
Or, prepare up until adding the crumbly topping. (You will add this right before baking.)
How to Freeze: Wrap and/or cover the casserole, preferably in cling plastic wrap — as we’ve found this works best for freezing food — and freeze up to three months.
To Reheat: allow it to thaw in the refrigerator before reheating. When thawed, if fully baked, bake at 350° for 30 minutes or until heated through. If unbaked, thaw, top with crumbly topping, and bake as instructed in the recipe card.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving (⅙ recipe) | Calories: 399kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 162mg | Sodium: 361mg | Potassium: 186mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 29g | Vitamin A: 628IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 106mg | Iron: 2mg

* Recipe originally published in 2015. Updated in June 2021 and April 2023.

The Lodge at Whitefish Lake, Montana

Looking for a weekend getaway in Montana for our family, we decided The Lodge at Whitefish Lake would be our destination. If you’ve been thinking about a quick trip, here’s why you’ll want to stay here!

View from condo of frozen lake at The Lodge at Whitefish.
Frozen Lake View from Condo

As you can probably tell from the photos, we chose to visit The Lodge at Whitefish in the winter (March, actually… but it was still “winter” there).

I highly recommend this time of year if you have a little cabin fever and need to get the kids out of the house.

See more Fantabulosity travel ideas!

Of course, the pool isn’t open but the hot tubs are, they have s’mores at night, and of course there are snow activities that some families may even enjoy doing. (We’re not one of those families… so you won’t be seeing any skiing adventures or snowshoeing trips here. Now cocktails… and food? We’re your family.)

Video Highlight of our Weekend Trip to The Lodge at Whitefish

I’ve compiled a reel on Instagram if you want to see even more details of our trip but make sure you see more details below with images, tips, and more about a weekend getaway for your family in Whitefish.

Whitefish Montana Weekend Trip

If you’re not from Montana, or rather, from Whitefish, then you may just be taken away by the beautiful views on the way TO Whitefish. We were lucky enough to drive through Polson, and around Flathead Lake on our route, and it was STUNNING.

But that wasn’t all… there were beautiful spots (like the one below) made up of mountains, beautiful (clean!) roads, and as my kids love to see… “tunnels!”

Driving to Whitefish montana, with a view of the road and mountains.

The Lodge at Whitefish Lake

When we arrived at the lodge, check-in was a breeze, and not to mention, beautiful with a welcoming outdoor fireplace. (See that in the highlight reel.)

When we called to book a room, we explained that we wanted a separate area for the kids to sleep in, so my husband and I could have our own room. (This is always a priority for us, so we can have our alone time.)

2 Bedroom Condo

We opted for the two-bedroom condo, so we’d have our own room, and the boys could share a bedroom.

After all the years of traveling, we actually prefer this type of hotel-style, condo accommodation, over Airbnb travel.

The condo had a living area, dining area, and full kitchen, which made it nice so we could cook an easy breakfast and quick lunches/meals in the condo when we didn’t feel like going out.

Besides… when you have two growing boys, it’s important to always have food around, and having a refrigerator made this easier to keep healthy snacks on hand.

The view from our condo was beautiful, even in the winter. The frozen lake, fluffy white snow, and even a train in the far distance (that you couldn’t hear) that looked beautiful passing by through the mountains.

View of frozen lake at Lodge of Whitefish Condo.

Whitefish Lodge Resort Services and Events

To be honest, we were only there for a couple of days, so we didn’t get to take advantage of nearly half of the amazing amenities and services that The Lodge at Whitefish offers, even in the winter!

Below you can see the winter resort services booklet that they gave us, and I so wish we would have been able to take part in the S’mores Outdoors, and family movie night for sure.

Events calendar at Lodge at Whitefish Lake

The Boat Club at The Lodge at Whitefish Lake

The first night we were there, we arrived around 7:00 so we immediately went to dinner, and couldn’t wait to dine at the Boat Club. The menu looked incredible and the reviews were wonderful.

We walked over to the restaurant from our room (super easy walk) and the boys had pizza off of their kid’s menu. My husband had a steak, and I had a small Caesar salad and we munched on their charcuterie board as an appetizer.

Our waitress was a lovely lady, and she even surprised us with a fun (free) cocktail sample at the beginning of dinner. (My kind of lady!)

Man and son walking at The Lodge at Whitefish.

Hot Tub at Whitefish Lodge

The next day, the boys were begging to go to the hot tub. We had a few to choose from; one inside with waterfalls and one outside, overlooking the frozen lake and mountains.

As you can see, we chose the one outside but I’m not going to lie… the boys were begging to head to the one with waterfalls afterward but we ran out of time.

Hot tub and lake view at The Lodge at Whitefish.
Book at The Lodge at Whitefish Lake

Downtown Whitefish Shops

Later in the day, we headed to downtown Whitefish to check out the shops and we were not disappointed. The mountain views, cute stores, and local goods were plentiful.

Downtown Whitefish.

The shops were plentiful, everyone was friendly, and we even saw some of the cutest dogs, shopping along with their owners along the way, and we were able to love on them for a few minutes.

Downtown Whitefish Family Photo

We love cruising the shops in little towns like this to see all the things that we don’t need but want.

Some gift items at the shops in Whitefish.

Restaurants in Whitefish

After visiting Whitefish quite a few times now, we’ve eaten some GREAT food. Our favorites are:

  • Craggy Range – Bar food, and Jessica, the bartender is my FAVORITE.
  • Latitude 48 Bistro – Pricey, but they have great martinis, great food, and a fun atmosphere in the basement.
  • The Boat House – This is in the Lodge at Whitefish Lake, and is a higher end atmosphere. We’ve had Thanksgiving dinner here and it was a pretty penny but it was delicious. We’ve also had dinner and drinks here often, and are always pleased.
  • The Palace – This is a bar, and they had $4 burgers that were incredible! Love supporting places like this that have good food, affordably.
  • Jalisco Cantina – Mexican food, that has wonderful cocktails and tacos!
Boy eating bbq at Piggyback BBQ in Whitefish.

While waiting for our lunch, we have to keep ourselves entertained… and the boys are usually really good at that. It’s either this or play UNO and Old Maid while we wait for food to help pass the time. (I recommend keeping cards in your purse so you can play while you wait.)

Boys smiling at the camera, laughing, in a 4 image collage.

Wrapping Up our Weekend Trip to Whitefish Montana

It was a quick trip to Whitefish, and we definitely didn’t get to do everything that we wanted to do, so we’ll be going back. Will we stay at The Lodge at Whitefish again? I don’t know. Would we? YES. Will we try something else so we can share it with you? We just may. Stay tuned for more travel ideas in Montana. We can’t stay home, and we know you’ll love visiting the places we do too.

Book at The Lodge at Whitefish Lake
What is there to do at Lodge at Whitefish Lake?

Depending on the time of year, there are many things you can do at Lodge at Whitefish Lake. In the winter, there are snow sports, hot tubs, S’mores Outdoors, family movie nights, dining, and more! In the summer, the lake is great for water sports, and the pool and outdoor areas are full of activities. If you’re looking for relaxation, the spa is also an amazing amenity.

How much does it cost to stay at Lodge at Whitefish Lake?

This depends on a few things: the time of year, the type of room you reserve, and who you book it through. We found it to be more affordable during the winter months, than in the summer months.

Is parking available at Lodge at Whitefish Lake?

Yes! Valet parking was offered upon arrival but self-parking, near the condos, was available as well.

What are some of the property amenities at Lodge at Whitefish Lake?

Free wifi, a restaurant that serves breakfast, lunch, and dinner, hot tubs and pools, a bar area, live music, free wine tastings, a spa, and family-friendly activities.

Pork Steaks in the Oven

These baked BBQ pork steaks in the oven are so easy and just like our slow cooker pork steaks, this is one that can be made with little effort, showing you how to bake!

Baked bbq pork steaks on white plate.

Why You’ll Love These Baked Pork Steaks

If you have pork steaks or pork shoulders (or blade steaks) sitting in your freezer or refrigerator, then you may have happened upon here while trying to find one of the BEST pork steak recipes you can find, for an easy dinner recipe.

Some pork recipes are grilled, some cooked in a cast iron pan with gravy drippings, some in a slow cooker, like this slow cooker bbq pulled pork, and more! But baking is by far our favorite way to have bbq pork steaks, with no marinade required!

When I shared how to cook steak in the oven, and how easy it is to get a melt-in-your-mouth steak with that process, I knew you’d love seeing how to bake all different kinds of steaks.

I think you’re in the right place and that you’re going to love how easy and how delicious this pork steak recipe is.

If you also saw my slow cooker bbq pork steaks recipe, then you may already know that cooking them slowly, over a longer period of time makes the pork steak meat literally fall off of the bone.

But when you need something a bit quicker, baking pork steaks in the oven is an alternative that definitely won’t disappoint you and will also leave you with tender pork steaks.

The day that I made these to take photos for the blog, I only made two steaks, as it was just the right amount for what we needed that day…however I’ve created the recipe in the recipe card below to reflect 4 pork steaks, as that would be more common for a family of 4.

What is a Pork Steak?

Pork steaks are a section of a hog that’s cut from the shoulder, and /or butt. Some grocery stores or butcher shops have pork steaks ready for you. However, if you are not able to find them, you can ask them to cut pork shoulder or pork butt in to steaks for grilling.

Uncooked pork steaks sitting on packaging.

What is the Difference Between Pork Chops and Pork Steaks?

Since pork steaks come from the shoulder and or butt area of a hog, the pork chops are cut from the loin section. Pork chops like these Baked Pork Chops, tend to be lean than pork steaks and can sometimes be more “dry” than pork steaks, where pork steaks tend to have more fat around the meat to help make them juicy. Now, if you have pork chops instead, this fried pork chops recipe is easy to make and frying them can add so much flavor!

Ingredients for Pork Steaks in the Oven

All you’ll need for these delicious, tender porks steaks are:

  • Pork Steaks – As many as you’ll need to serve.
  • Salt – This is optional, and remember that your barbeque sauce could have salt in it.
  • Pepper – This is also optional, and it’s important to keep in mind how spicy the bbq sauce is that you’re using.
  • BBQ Sauce – your favorite kind will do! We love using Sweet Baby Rays.

How to Cook Pork Steak

Now of course you don’t have to cook pork steaks with bbq sauce, but for us, it’s really hard to cook them/eat them any other way.

Feel free to have fun creating sauces and using different spices for your pork steaks, but if you’re wanting to bake your steaks in the oven, then this is a great reference to find out how long to cook them.

You can find the full recipe card with an ingredient list and instructions at the bottom of this post.

Start by preheating your oven to 400º and then cover your pork steaks with salt and pepper (if desired).

PRO TIP: You can even pound your pork steaks with a meat tenderizer before seasoning them if you want to make sure they’re super tender.

4 image collage of baked pork steaks.
  1. Next, line a baking pan (large enough to fit the number of steaks you’re cooking, so they don’t overlap) with aluminum foil for easy cleaning, and then drizzle a layer of barbeque sauce on the aluminum foil where you’ll place each steak.
  2. Place your steaks down on the foil and sauce.
  3. Then, cover steaks with the remaining bbq sauce.

How Long Should You Cook Pork Steaks in the Oven?

  1. Bake the pork steaks uncovered for 50-60 minutes, (on the middle rack) or until the internal temperature of the steaks reaches 145 degrees.

NOTE: Oven temperatures can vary, and some have reported that they prefer baking at 350 for 50-60 minutes, or checking the internal temp after 30 minutes to avoid over-cooking. I’ve even used different ovens and have found myself, cooking them for shorter/longer times, so it’s best to check to see what works best for yours.

Cut bbq pork steaks with a piece on a fork.

Expert Tips:

  • Flexible: You can cook one pork steak up to as many as you want/need, as long as they fit in the baking pan you plan to use, and if you have enough bbq sauce to cover them. You can even pop some hot dogs in the oven for the kids, since you bake those at the same temperature. (Just not as long!)
  • Dinner Meal Plan: Cook more than you need, and serve the leftovers, sliced, on bbq nachos, on a side salad to make it an entree, or as a sandwich!

Recipe FAQs

What temperature do you cook pork steaks?

Bake pork steaks at 400° for 50-60 minutes.

Should pork steaks rest before serving?

Although it’s not a must, it is a great idea to allow it to rest for a few minutes before serving to all of the juices to set in before slicing.

What should the internal temperature be of cooked pork steaks?

The internal temperature of cooked pork steaks should reach at least 145°F before eating.

How to Store

Refrigerate: If you have leftover pork steaks, it’s best to allow them to cool and then place in an airtight container, in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.

Freeze: You can freeze leftover pork steaks in a freezer-safe container for up to 3-4 months.

Thaw: Thaw the pork steaks in the refrigerator overnight.

Reheat: Sometimes reheating cooked pork steaks can make them dry. So if reheating in the oven, place the pork steaks in a baking pan (with raised sides) and pour about ¼ cup of broth in the bottom, to help add moisture to the steaks while reheating.

What Side Dishes to Serve with Pork Steaks

Side dishes that go with bbq pulled pork are often delicious with pork steaks too! This KFC coleslaw is a staple side dish for pork recipes but I also LOVE Pasta Salads!

This creamy corn casserole recipe, Amish Potato Salad or this old-fashioned potato salad (or this cauliflower potato salad for low-carb eaters), and this Cornbread Salad.

But, adding some ground beef to baked beans lately has been a winner too!

Meal Planning for the Week?

Since the oven is hot, consider making burgers in the oven too, so you can eat on them all week! Just re-heat and serve! Or, making these cube steaks in the slow cooker is so easy!

More Pork Recipes

We love having pork steaks and pork chops around here. They’re so easy and actually pretty affordable. Here are our favorite pork recipes that you don’t want to miss…

Recipe

BBQ pork steaks cooked in the oven, that are on a white plate.
Print Pin
4.64 from 406 votes

BBQ Pork Steaks in the Oven

These BBQ pork steaks in the oven are so easy. Season, sauce and bake at 400° F. for delicious, tender and juicy pork steaks.
Course Main Course
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 steaks
Calories 208kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 4 pork steaks or pork shoulders
  • salt to taste
  • pepper to taste
  • 16 ounce bottle of barbecue sauce I use Sweet Baby Rays

Instructions

  • Prep: Preheat oven to 400 degrees
  • Season: Rub salt and pepper on both sides of each pork steak if desired
    4 pork steaks or pork shoulders, salt, pepper
  • Cover Pan: Line a baking pan (large enough to fit the number of steaks you're cooking, so they don't overlap) with aluminum foil.
  • Sauce the Pan: Drizzle half a bottle of barbeque sauce on the aluminum foil where you'll place each steak.
    16 ounce bottle of barbecue sauce
  • Sauce the Steaks: Place your steaks down on the foil and sauce, and then cover steaks with remaining bbq sauce.
  • Bake: Bake the pork steaks at 400 degrees, uncovered for 50-60 minutes, (on the middle rack) or until the internal temperature of the steaks reaches 145 degrees.
    NOTE: Oven temperatures can vary, and some have reported that they prefer baking at 350 for 50-60 minutes, or checking the internal temp after 30 minutes to avoid over-baking.

Video

Notes

Storage of Leftovers:
Refrigerate: If you have leftover pork steaks, it’s best to allow them to cool and then place in an airtight container, in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
Freeze: If you’d like to freeze leftovers, allow them to fully cool, and store in a freezer-safe container for 3-4 months.
Thaw: Thaw the pork steaks in the refrigerator overnight.
Reheat: Sometimes reheating cooked pork steaks can make them dry. So if reheating in the oven, place the pork steaks in a baking pan (with raised sides) and pour about ¼ cup of broth in the bottom, to help add moisture to the steaks while reheating.

Nutrition

Serving: 1steak | Calories: 208kcal | Protein: 28g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 89mg | Sodium: 66mg | Potassium: 499mg | Calcium: 9mg | Iron: 0.7mg

The BEST Tuna Salad Recipe

This tuna salad recipe will become your new favorite! It’s not your boring, everyday tuna salad. The ingredients in this are mind-blowing and will change your tuna salad life. Just read the comments! It’s not just me saying that!

Quick Overview: In only 10 minutes, this easy recipe will become what you consider, the best tuna salad recipe! It ranks right up there with the BEST Chicken Salad Recipe and this Avocado BLT.

Tuna sandwiches, stacked on top of one another

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

During the summer months, tuna salad sandwiches are one of my favorite summer recipes to make for a lunch recipe. (But you can have it for main course too! Especially after being outside all day on a hot day!) It’s a great sandwich to rotate between ham salad sandwiches and egg salad sandwiches!

Plus, they’re easy, and don’t require heating up the kitchen!

You can also use the tuna salad to top a bed of lettuce with, eat with crackers and so much more!

Which Type of Tuna is Best?

It’s so nice to be able to keep a can of tuna in the pantry for those last minute meals, like this tuna pasta salad recipe and this tuna casserole, and for this tuna recipe, you can use whatever kind of tuna you prefer: albacore, tuna with olive oil, etc.

However, I think the best kind of tuna is white tuna in water, in case you find that helpful! (See “substitutions” and FAQs below if you decide to use something other than what I used!)

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients for this Tuna Salad Recipe

I’ve had and have made tuna salad sandwiches many different ways over the years but I keep coming back to the classic tuna salad that uses simple ingredients, and that’s what I want to share with you today!

ingredients for tuna salad on table

See the recipe card below for full ingredients and instructions.

  • Canned tuna: For this recipe we choose solid white albacore tuna in water and flaked it after draining. You may use other canned tuna if you have a preference.
  • Real mayonnaise: Mayo is used as a binder for the ingredients to come together in perfect harmony. There are many options for mayo. For this recipe we prefer to use real mayonnaise. Elevate this recipe by using mayo made with olive oil!
  • Sweet pickle relish: You may substitute dill relish or even chop your own favorite pickles!
  • Red onion: Depth and savory flavor profile.
  • Celery: Celery brings a fresh crunch to this elevated dish.
  • Fresh lemon juice and flat-leaf parsley: Both of these ingredients elevate this dish and bring a freshness to the recipe.
  • Dried chives and garlic powder: Chives elevate and enhance the flavor profile of this delicious salad.
  • Kosher salt and ground black pepper: Salt and pepper are perfect companions for tuna!

Substitutions

  1. If you choose canned tuna packed in oil, you may want to reduce the mayonnaise to ¼ cup.
  2. You may use a number of mayonnaise options including mayo alternatives, such as Miracle Whip, plant based mayo, avocado oil mayo, plain Greek yogurt, etc.
  3. You may use dill relish or your own minced sweet pickles or dill pickles instead of sweet relish if you prefer less sweetness.
  4. If you are averse to red onion, try substituting green onion, diced apples or grapes!
  5. Lime juice instead of lemon juice. (I haven’t tried this but I’m sure it would have great flavor!)

Variations

  • Make a tuna melt: Simply make the tuna salad as stated, and then make it like a grilled cheese sandwich!
  • Tuna Lettuce Wrap: Serve this recipe on a bed of lettuce or in one giant romaine lettuce leaf as a wrap!
  • Additional Mix-in ideas: Looking to kick things up a notch? Here are some extra ingredients I’ve added to tuna salad before, that you may want to try: hot sauce, curry powder (like the flavors in our curry egg salad), garlic clove – chopped, (or garlic powder) a teaspoon of dijon mustard (or so), red bell pepper, or fresh dill!

How to Make This Tuna Salad Recipe

In only 10 minutes you’ll have delicious tuna salad ready for bread, a croissant or even eat with crackers!

drained tuna placed in glass bowl
Pour drained tuna in glass bowl
mayo, onion, celery and relish added to bowl
Add mayo, onion, relish, celery & lemon juice
  1. Drain the water from the tuna and place in a medium mixing bowl.
  2. Next, add ⅓ cup real mayonnaise, ¼ cup sweet pickle relish, 2 tablespoons red onion, minced, 1 stalk celery, minced, and 1 tablespoon of lemon juice to the mixing bowl of tuna.
herbs & seasonings added to bowl
Add herbs & seasonings
tuna mixed with ingredients in bowl
Stir to combine
  1. Then add 1 tablespoon flat-leaf parsley, 1 teaspoon dried chives, 1 teaspoon garlic powder, ¼ teaspoon kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon ground black pepper.
  2. Combine together using a rubber spatula or spoon. Be sure all of the ingredients are well blended.
tuna salad on lettuce leaf, on top of bread slice

Hint: To elevate and add heat to this delicious recipe, add 1 small minced jalapeno!

close up of tuna salad on bread

Recipe FAQs

When it comes to tuna and even tuna salad, there may be some questions that you have. Here are answers to the most common questions:

What mixes well with canned tuna?

Canned tuna mixes so well with so many things. Mayo, mashed avocado, lettuce salad, pasta, breadcrumbs, eggs, and so much more. Some of these items mixed in with tuna, make amazing dishes such as tuna salad, tuna casseroles, avocado toast, and even tuna patties.

What can I add to canned tuna to make it better?

Fresh herbs, seasonings, spices, creamy bases, and veggies for a crunch, are always good options to add to canned tuna to make it better! Using tuna as a protein like you would other proteins like salmon and chicken can be a great idea.

Why does restaurant tuna salad taste better?

If you find that your tuna at home doesn’t taste as good as it does when eating at a cafe, diner, or restaurant, it’s possibly because the tuna salad was made earlier, and it has allowed the flavors to combine and settle together in the refrigerator. Try making your tuna salad in advance, and then not only will the flavors have time to blend, but it will be a quick meal idea too!

What can I use in tuna instead of mayo?

Greek yogurt, plain yogurt or Miracle Whip can be a substitute for mayo in tuna, if desired. If looking for a vegan option though, a vegan mayo can be used. Mashed avocado can also be a great substitute for a creamy base.

Should I rinse canned tuna before using?

No need to rinse canned tuna before using it. It’s safe to eat right out of the can unless it’s in oil, and then you may want to rinse it.

Is tuna in oil better than water for tuna salad?

This is a personal preference and it could also depend on how you’re serving or using the canned tuna. Tuna in oil can add a slightly different flavor and more calories. Tuna in water could reduce the calories and help capture the true tuna flavor.
The texture of tuna with oil is something to think about, compared to water as well. As far as blending canned tuna with other ingredients, oily tuna can blend well with the other creamy ingredients too.

Tuna salad sandwich with crackers on plate

What to Serve with Tuna Salad

Tuna Sandwich: You can enjoy the tuna salad on only slices of bread, or you can top the tuna salad sandwich with: crisp lettuce, bacon (you can even do bacon cooked in the air fryer or turkey bacon), a slice of onion, avocado halves (or slices), a drizzle of balsamic vinegar, fresh veggies or more fresh herbs, or even top with potato chips for an extra “crunch!”

Tuna Salad: This is delicious when served with crackers or even your favorite chips. (You could even use sliced peppers or sliced cucumbers to dip if going low-carb.) It’s also delicious when served on top of a leafy green salad.

Storage

You may store this tuna salad in the refrigerator using an airtight container, for up to 5 days!

Due to the fact that there is mayonnaise in this recipe, refrigerate after 2 hours for food safety reasons.

Top Tip

If you choose a solid white canned tuna, you may need to flake the meat after you drain the water.

If you loved this classic recipe, then you’ll also love this egg salad recipe, this chicken grilled cheese, and this fried peanut butter and jelly!

Recipe

two tuna salad sandwiches stacked on top of one another
Print Pin
5 from 91 votes

The BEST Tuna Salad Recipe

This tuna salad recipe is the best and will become your new favorite! Red onion, sweet pickle relish, celery, and a few simple spices will combine for INCREDIBLE flavor!
Course Main Course, Salad, Side Dish
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 sandwiches
Calories 266kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 12 ounces can tuna, drained
  • ⅓ cup real mayonnaise see substitutions in post
  • ¼ cup sweet pickle relish see substitutions in post
  • 2 Tablespoons red onion, minced
  • 1 stalk celery, minced
  • 1 Tablespoon lemon juice
  • 1 Tablespoon flat-leaf parsley
  • 1 teaspoon dried chives if desired
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

Instructions

  • Drain the water from the tuna and place in a medium mixing bowl.
  • Next, add ⅓ cup real mayonnaise, ¼ cup sweet pickle relish, 2 tablespoons red onion, minced, 1 stalk celery, minced, and 1 tablespoon of lemon juice to the mixing bowl of tuna.
  • Then add 1 tablespoon flat-leaf parsley, 1 teaspoon dried chives, 1 teaspoon garlic powder, ¼ teaspoon kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon ground black pepper and combine together using a rubber spatula. Be sure all of the ingredients are well blended.
  • Serve on your favorite bread or a bed of lettuce with crackers. Enjoy!

Video

Notes

TIP: If you choose a solid white canned tuna, you may need to flake the meat after you drain the water.
Storage: Store this tuna salad in the refrigerator using an airtight container, for up to 5 days. Especially since there is mayonnaise in this recipe, refrigerate after 2 hours for food safety reasons.

Nutrition

Serving: 1sandwich | Calories: 266kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 21g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 44mg | Sodium: 719mg | Potassium: 296mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1188IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 1mg

Fried Peanut Butter and Jelly Sandwich

This Fried Peanut Butter and Jelly Sandwich takes your classic pb&j recipe to the next level. The outside is golden brown, and inside the two slices of bread is gooey peanut butter combined with warm jelly.

Made like a grilled cheese sandwich (and our chicken grilled cheese) it’s cooked on the stovetop over medium-low heat, to get the crispy bread. It’s the perfect easy lunch idea or even a warm breakfast recipe.

Fried peanut butter and jelly sandwich on a white plate.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

We all love the pb&j from childhood, and now, with this method, you can still have the famous sandwich but with a twist, with a delicious, buttery coating.

Why You’ll Love this Recipe

  • Crispy & Creamy: The texture of this sandwich is completely different than simply spreading peanut butter and jelly on two pieces of bread. The golden, crispy, outside texture combines perfectly with the inside, creamy texture.
  • Restaurant Style: If you ever watch shows that feature fun and different recipes, this fried peanut butter & jelly feels like something you’d find at a “must-visit” diner.
  • Ready in minutes: With a regular pb&j only taking a few minutes, don’t be intimidated by the extra step of frying or grilling! It will only take a few minutes to cook the sandwich on both sides.
Sliced friend peanut butter and jelly sandwich on white plate, surrounded by milk jars and strawberries.

Fried PB&J Ingredients & Variations

The beautiful thing about this sandwich is that you can use your favorite ingredients that you love using to make a peanut butter and jelly, and then add one more ingredient (butter).

Ingredients for fried peanut butter and jelly sandwich.
  • Bread – There are so many options for bread. Brioche, sliced white bread, wheat, or your favorite sandwich bread.
  • Peanut Butter – Crunchy or creamy, or even a substitute like Nutella or your favorite nut butter will work too.
  • Jelly – Strawberry or grape jelly work, or you can even use your favorite flavor of jam.
  • Butter – Using spreadable butter is recommended so it slides across the bread easier. Or, if you have stick butter, melt it gently to make it smooth to spread easier. Salted butter is a great option because it adds that hint of salt with all of the sweetness.

How to Make a Fried Peanut Butter and Jelly Sandwich

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-4 image collage of how to make a friend peanut butter and jelly.
  1. Add Peanut Butter – Spread peanut butter on one side, of one slice of bread.
  2. Spread Jelly – Then, spread jelly on one side, of the other slice of bread.
  3. Butter the Bread – Place the coated sides of the bread together, so they form a classic pb&j. Next, coat the outside of both sides of the sandwich, with butter and place on a skillet, and cook over medium-high heat for 3-4 minutes or until the side facing down, is a golden brown.
  4. Toast the Bread – Flip once golden, and cook the other side for 3-4 minutes, or until golden brown. Serve!
Fried, whole, peanut butter and jelly sandwich on white plate.

Tip: Sprinkle with a little powdered sugar if desired for an extra sweet treat.

Sliced fried peanut butter and jelly sandwich on white plate.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Multiple Sandwiches – If making multiple sandwiches, make as many sandwiches as you need, up until the point of adding them to a skillet. Using a griddle (a much larger cooking surface) place all of the assembled sandwiches on the griddle at the same time, in a single layer, to cook them at the same time. This way, you’re not making one at a time, which can be time-consuming.
  • Fun Additions. Love bananas on your peanut butter sandwich? Slice bananas to place on the peanut butter, or add other fun items like marshmallow fluff or honey or syrup like in our peanut butter and syrup sandwich, bacon, or even sprinkles!

Recipe FAQs

Should peanut butter and jelly sandwiches be toasted?

They don’t have to be but they’re delicious when toasted. But frying them in a pan is ideal, rather than using a toaster because the jelly and peanut butter can melt out.

What is the best bread for PB&J?

We think sliced white bread is the best for pb&j but brioche is a delicious option too.

Do you use smooth or crunchy peanut butter in PBJ?

This is a personal preference, however, crunch peanut butter can make the sandwich “unbalanced” so the bread can slip around more, due to the nuts.

Is jam or jelly better for PB&J?

Either one works but jam will slide on more smooth, as jelly can be a little “bumpy” causing the bread to slide around a little more.

More Sandwich Recipes

If you love classic sandwiches and fun recipes to make for lunch, you’ll love these reader favorites too:

Recipe

Fried peanut butter and jelly sandwich, sliced on white plate.
Print Pin
5 from 7 votes

Fried Peanut Butter and Jelly Sandwich

A fried peanut butter and jelly sandwich is your classic pb&j, cooked on the stovetop with butter, giving it a crispy outside with a warm and gooey inside.
Course Main Course, Snack
Cuisine American
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 1 sandwich
Calories 326kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 2 slices bread Your favorite sliced sandwich bread
  • 1 ½ Tablespoon peanut butter smooth or crunchy
  • 1 ½ Tablespoon jelly or jam
  • 1 Tablespoon butter

Instructions

  • Add Peanut Butter – Spread peanut butter on one side, of one slice of bread.
  • Spread Jelly – Then, spread jelly on one side, of the other slice of bread.
  • Butter the Bread – Place the coated sides of the bread together, so they form a classic pb&j. Next, coat the outside of both sides of the sandwich, with butter and place on a skillet, and cook over medium-high heat for 3-4 minutes or until the side facing down, is a golden brown.
  • Toast the Bread – Flip once golden, and cook the other side for 3-4 minutes, or until golden brown. Serve!

Notes

Multiple Sandwiches – If making multiple sandwiches, make as many sandwiches as you need, up until the point of adding them to a skillet. Using a griddle (a much larger cooking surface) place all of the assembled sandwiches on the griddle at the same time, in a single layer, to cook them at the same time. This way, you’re not making one at a time, which can be time-consuming.
 

Nutrition

Serving: 1sandwich | Calories: 326kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 30mg | Sodium: 430mg | Potassium: 153mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 350IU | Vitamin C: 0.9mg | Calcium: 77mg | Iron: 2mg

Hamburger Hashbrown Casserole

This hamburger hashbrown casserole recipe is full of creamy and cheesy goodness and has so much flavor with the seasonings and the peppers and onions. It’s a casserole recipe that’s amazing as a main dish recipe that the whole family will love, or even as a hearty side dish recipe that’s great for the holidays or potlucks!

Hamburger hashbrown casserole in baking dish with spoon resting in it.

There’s something so comforting about seeing a hashbrown casserole on the dinner table. It’s usually full of cheese, shredded hashbrowns, or diced potatoes, and finished with a creamy soup and seasonings.

This easy meal is no different. But what makes this recipe better than others, is that it has the flavors of the peppers and onions, for that perfect hint of pepper flavor on top of all of the other amazing flavors going on.

Now, if you’re looking for a dish that doesn’t have meat, these crock pot cheesy potatoes may be for you! Or, this sausage casserole in the slow cooker with kielbasa is a similar dish, that uses a different type of meat.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients Needed

Labeled ingredients on counter for hamburger hashbrown casserole.
  • 2 pounds ground beef
  • 2 teaspoons cooking oil
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper, divided
  • 2 teaspoons salt, divided
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 2 cups frozen seasoning blend
  • 2 – 10.5 ounce cans cream of mushroom soup
  • 12 ounce can evaporated milk
  • 30 ounce package frozen hashbrown potatoes
  • 4 Tablespoons butter, melted
  • 2 cups cheddar cheese, shredded (divided)
  • 1 cup mozzarella cheese, shredded 

Substitutions

This recipe can be flexible if you prefer certain flavors, types of meat or you simply only have specific items on hand. Here are some suggestions that you may find helpful:

  • Cheese – we love using cheddar and mozzarella for this recipe but feel free to use your favorite types of melty cheese instead. Or, you could also try using canned cheddar cheese soup or
  • Meat – you can use ground chicken, ground sausage, or your favorite ground meat substitute, instead of this ground beef casserole, if you prefer. (In case you want to use it for these other ground beef dinner ideas.)
  • Soup – Cream of chicken soup instead of cream of mushroom soup would also be a great soup to use if you’d rather have that.
  • Potatoes – although we highly recommend using frozen shredded hashbrowns, you could also use frozen diced potatoes instead.

How to Make Hamburger Hashbrown Casserole

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Before Beginning: Heat oven to 375 degrees, grease a 9 x 13 inch casserole dish, and remove hashbrowns from the freezer so they can thaw while you’re prepping other things.

Steps 1-4 on how to make hashbrown hamburger casserole.
  1. Place oil and ground beef in a medium to large skillet. Brown ground beef over medium heat until the beef is just done and is not pink, about 5 minutes. Make sure to break beef into small pieces while cooking.
  2. Once the ground beef is done cooking, drain the meat and return to the skillet.
  3. Stir in 1 ½ teaspoons salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper, garlic, and seasoning blend.
  4. Cook for an additional 5 minutes stirring frequently to make sure seasonings are evenly distributed.
Steps 5-8 of making hashbrown hamburger casserole.
  1. Then stir in half (1 cup) of the cheddar cheese, and stir to mix in.
  1. In a medium bowl combine the cans of mushroom soup with the evaporated milk. Mix together until smooth. You can do this with a mixer but a fork also works well. 
  1. Spread the ground beef mixture into the bottom of the greased 9 x 13 inch pan.
  2. Pour the soup mixture over the beef mixture in the pan. Spread out the soup mixture with a spoon or spatula to make sure it covers the beef evenly.
Steps 9-12 of how to make hamburger hash brown casserole.
  1. In a small bowl, mix the remaining salt (½ teaspoon) and pepper (½ teaspoon) with the melted butter.
  1. Pour over the partially thawed hash browns that are in a large mixing bowl. Toss to coat the hash browns in the butter mixture.

Pro Tip: If you have excess water, discard this, instead of mixing it with the melted butter and seasonings.

  1. Evenly spread the buttered hash browns onto the soup mixture.
  1. Bake in the preheated oven for 45 minutes to 1 hour or until the edges are bubbly and light golden brown and the center is hot. Then, after baking for one hour, sprinkle the cheddar and mozzarella cheese on top of the casserole and bake for an additional 5 minutes until the cheese is melted.
Baked hamburger hashbrown casserole in glass baking dish.

Allow to Rest: Let the hashbrown hamburger casserole rest for 5 minutes before serving.

Ladle holding hamburger hashbrown casserole above the baking dish.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • For a smaller batch: This recipe can easily be halved and baked in an 8 ½ X 4 ½ in (6 cup) loaf pan. Cook for 40 minutes at 375 before adding cheese when doing this. 
  • Make ahead: This dish is easy to make the day before. To do this layer the beef, soup, and potatoes then cover and refrigerate. When ready to cook the next day, cover the pan with foil and bake at 375 degrees for 45 minutes. Then remove the foil and bake for 15 minutes until bubbly and cooked through. Then add cheese and bake for an additional 5 minutes to melt the cheese. 

Recipe FAQs

Do I have to thaw frozen hash browns for casserole?

It’s best for them to thaw before baking hashbrowns in a casserole. If you pull them out of the freezer right when starting this recipe, they’ll thaw while making the ground beef and prepping the layers.

Why is my hash brown casserole soggy?

If it’s soggy it could be because the hashbrowns were not thawed, and the water from the hashbrowns has caused the casserole to be wet.

Do you cook meat before putting it in a casserole?

Yes! Cooking the ground beef before adding it to the baking in the dish is important.

Hamburger hashbrown casserole serving on white dinner plate.

Storage

Allow the casserole to cool to room temperature and then refrigerate any leftovers of the hamburger hash brown casserole in an airtight container, or cover with plastic wrap, for up to 3 days. To reheat, microwave in a microwave-safe dish.  

Fork holding a bite of hamburger hashbrown casserole.

What to Serve with this Casserole

So many things can go great with this delicious casserole. A green salad recipe or even something like this roasted garlic broccoli is delicious with it! Or, if you want to keep things really simple, see how to make canned green beans taste better!

Similar Recipes

If you love simple recipes like this one, you’ll also love these reader favorites that are similar with ground beef or potatoes:

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Hamburger hashbrown casserole in baking dish with ladle resting in it.
Print Pin
5 from 13 votes

Hamburger Hashbrown Casserole

Hamburger hashbrown casserole is a delicious and hearty main dish or side dish recipe that uses simple ingredients but has so much flavor. Perfect for an easy dinner or a potluck!
Course Main Course
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 8 servings
Calories 680kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds ground beef
  • 2 teaspoons cooking oil
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper divided
  • 2 teaspoons salt divided
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 2 cups frozen veggie seasoning blend Frozen vegetable mixture of onions, red pepper, green pepper, celery, and parsley, or similar.
  • 2 – 10.5 ounce cans cream of mushroom soup
  • 12 ounce can evaporated milk
  • 30 ounces frozen shredded hashbrowns
  • 4 Tablespoons butter melted
  • 2 cups shredded cheddar cheese divided
  • 1 cup shredded mozzarella

Instructions

  • Heat oven to 375 degrees, grease a 9 x 13 inch pan, and remove hash browns from the freezer so they can thaw while you're prepping the rest.
  • Place oil and ground beef in a medium to large skillet. Cook ground beef over medium heat until the beef is just done and is not pink, about 5 minutes. Make sure to break beef into small pieces while cooking.
  • Once done drain meat and return to the skillet.
  • Stir in 1 ½ teaspoons salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper, garlic, and seasoning blend. Cook for an additional 5 minutes stirring frequently to make sure seasonings are evenly distributed. Then stir in half (1 cup) of the cheddar cheese.
  • Spread beef mixture into the bottom of the greased 9 x 13 inch pan.
  • In a medium bowl combine the cans of mushroom soup with the evaporated milk. Mix together until smooth. You can do this with a mixer but a fork also works well. 
  • In a large bowl mix the remaining salt (½ teaspoon) and pepper (½ teaspoon) with the melted butter and pour over the partially thawed hash browns. Toss to coat the hash browns in the butter mixture.
  • Pour the soup mixture over the beef mixture in the pan. Spread out the soup mixture with a spoon or spatula to make sure it covers the beef evenly.
  • Evenly spread the buttered hash browns onto the soup mixture.
  • Bake for 45 minutes to 1 hour or until the edges are bubbly and light brown and the center is hot.
  • Once done cooking sprinkle cheddar and mozzarella cheeses on top and bake for an additional 5 minutes until cheese is melted.
  • Let the casserole rest for 5 minutes before serving.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 680kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 36g | Fat: 46g | Saturated Fat: 22g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 147mg | Sodium: 1067mg | Potassium: 877mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 2966IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 427mg | Iron: 4mg